Philips FTP1.1E Schematic

Page 1
Colour Television Chassis
FTP1.1E
CL 36532075_000.eps
241103
Contents Page Contents Page
1. Technical Specifications and Chassis Overview 2
2. Safety Instructions, Warnings, and Notes 4
3. Directions for Use 5
4. Mechanical Instructions 17
5. Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding 19
6. Wiring Diagram, Block Diagrams and Overviews Wiring Diagram 29 Block Diagram Video 30 Testpoint Overview Small Signal Board 31 Block Diagram Audio 32 Supply Lines Overview 33 I2C IC’s overview 34
7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts Diagram PWB Audio and Supply, DC Prot. (Diagram A1) 35 42-43 Filters (Diagram A2) 36 42-43 Audio Amplifier Left High (Diagram A3) 37 42-43 Audio Amplifier Left Low (Diagram A4) 38 42-43 Audio Amplifier Right High (Diagram A5) 39 42-43 Audio Amplifier Right Low (Diagram A6) 40 42-43 Supply & DC Protection (Diagram A7) 41 42-43 SSB: Connector (Diagram B1) 44 72-83 SSB: IF, I/O Videoprocessing (Diagram B2) 45 72-83 SSB: Feature Box (PICNIC) (Diagram B3A) 46 72-83 SSB: Falconic (Diagram B3B) 47 72-83 SSB: Eagle (Diagram B3C) 48 72-83 SSB: 2FH Interface (Diagram B3D) 49 72-83 SSB: HOP (Diagram B4) 50 72-83 SSB: OTC-Flash (Diagram B5A) 51 72-83 SSB: Backlight Control (Diagram B5B) 52 72-83 SSB: OTC-Flash (Diagram B5C) 52 72-83 SSB: Audio Demodulator (Diagram B6A) 53 72-83 SSB: Dolby Digital Decoder (Diagram B6B) 54 72-83 SSB: Dolby Pro Logic Proc. (Diagram B6C) 55 72-83 SSB: DC/DC-Convertor (Diagram B12) 56 72-83
©
Copyright 2003 Philips Consumer Electronics B.V. Eindhoven, The Netherlands. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise without the prior permission of Philips.
SSB: Tun1/Tun2 (Diagram B13) 57 72-83 SSB: I/O Eur (Diagram B14A) 58 72-83 SSB: I/O Eur (Diagram B14B) 59 72-83 SSB: 2FH I/O (Diagram B14C) 60 72-83 SSB: Audio I/O (Diagram B14D) 61 72-83 SSB: I/O EUR PDP (Diagram B14E) 62 72-83 SSB: PIP-HIP (Diagram B15A) 63 72-83 SSB: PIP (Diagram B15B) 64 72-83 SSB: PIP-Muppet (Diagram B15C) 65 72-83 SSB: VGA RGB (Diagram B19A) 66 72-83 SSB: HDI A/D Convertor (Diagram B19C) 67 72-83 SSB: EPLD Control (Diagram B19D) 68 72-83 SSB: EPLD OSD (Diagram B19E) 69 72-83 SSB: EPLD I/O (Diagram B19F) 70 72-83 SSB: I/O 2 (Diagram B20) 71 72-83 EMC Filter Panel (Diagram EMC) 84 84 LED/Switch Panel (Diagram LD) 85 86 Top Control (Diagram P) 87 88
8. Electrical Alignments 89
9. Circuit Descriptions 95 Abbreviation List 111 IC Data Sheets 114
10 Spare Parts List 118 11 Revision List 127
Published by WO 0371 Service PaCE Printed in The Netherlands Subject to modification EN 3122 785 14370
Page 2
EN 2 FTP1.1E1.
Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview

1. Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview

Index of this chapter:
1. Technical Specifications
2. Connections
3. Chassis Overview
Note: Figures below can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to the different set executions.

1.1 Technical Specifications

1.1.1 Vision

Display type : DV-Plasma, 16:9 Screen size : 42-inch (107 cm) Resolution (HxV) : 852(x3) x 480 pixels Contrast ratio : 1000:1 Light output : 650 cd/m^2 Viewing angle (HxV) : 160x160 deg. Tuning system : PLL Colour systems : PAL B/G, D/K, I
: SECAM B/G, D/K, L,
L1 Video playback : NTSC 4.43/3.58 Channel selections : 100 presets
: UVSH Aerial input : 75 ohm, IEC-type Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm : 1074x644x135

1.1.2 Sound

Sound systems : AV Stereo,
: BI NICAM BG - 2CS
BG,
: BI NICAM BG/D - 2CS
BG,
: BI NICAM BG/K - 2CS
BG
Maximum power : 2 x 15 W_rms (int.)

1.1.3 Miscellaneous

1.2.2 Audio receiver (if present)

Audio - In (Cinch)
C - Audio - Centre jq
Audio - Out (Cinch)
R - Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm kq L - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm kq
Audio - Out (Cinch)
R - Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm kq L - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm kq

1.2.3 VGA

VGA (Input)
1
6
11
5
10
15
Figure 1-2 VGA Connector
1 - Red 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm j 2 - Green 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm j 3 - Blue 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm j 4 - Ground H 5 - Ground H 6 - Ground H 7 - Ground H 8 - Ground H 9 - 5V_DC_OUT +5 V_dc k 10 - Ground H 11 - Ground H 12 - DDC_SDA j 13 - H-sync 0 - 5 V j 14 - V-sync 0 - 5 V j 15 - DDC_SCL j
Mains voltage : 198 - 264 V_ac Mains frequency : 50 / 60 Hz Ambient temperature : +5 to +40 deg. C Maximum humidity : 90 % R.H. Power consumption :
- Normal operation : 340 W
- Standby : < 3 W

1.2 Connections

1.2.1 Rear/Bottom Connections

~MAINS
ANTENNA
75
SERVICE
EXT 3 EXT 1
EXT 2
MENU/OK
IR LIGHT SENSOR
RED
Figure 1-1 Rear/Bottom connections
CINEMA LINK
P/CH
Pr
Pb
Y
Y Pb Pr
R
L
NO FUCTION
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
VGA
RECEIVER
IN
R
L
CENTRE IN
CL 36532075_056.eps
241103
Cinch (Input)
- Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm jq
- Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm jq
- Y 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm jq
- Pb 0.35 V_pp / 75 ohm jq
- Pr 0.35 V_pp / 75 ohm jq

1.2.4 SCARTs

121
CL96532137_056.eps
202
171199
Figure 1-3 SCART connector
Page 3
Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview
EN 3FTP1.1E 1.
Table 1-1 SCARTs overview Because this set is not equipped with a side I/O, a separate
converter is added with the set. Use this SCART to cinch
Signal Signal level Type
Pin
1 Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm
2 Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
3 Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm
4 Audio - Gnd Ground
5 Blue - Gnd Ground
6 Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
7 Blue / U 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm
C-out 0.3 V_pp / 75 ohm
8 CVBS-status 0 - 2 V: INT
9 Green - Gnd Ground
10 P50 Easylink
11 Green / Y 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm
12 N.C.
13 Red - Gnd Ground
14 FBL - Gnd Ground
15 Red / V 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm
C-in 0.3 V_pp / 75 ohm
16 Status / FBL 0 - 0.4 V: INT1 - 3 V:
17 Video - Gnd Ground
18 Video - Gnd Ground
19 CVBS-out 1 V_pp / 75 ohm
Y-out 1 V_pp / 75 ohm
20 CVBS-in 1 V_pp / 75 ohm
Y-in 1 V_pp / 75 ohm
21 Shielding Ground
x = connected o = not connected
- = not used
4.5 - 7 V: EXT 16:9
9.5 - 12 V: EXT 4:3
EXT / 75 ohm
EXT1 EXT2 EXT3
k
xxGnd
j
xxx
k
xxGnd
H
xxx
H
xxx
j
xxx
j
xxo
k
--o
j
xxx
H
xxx
jk
oxo
j
xxo ooo
H
xxx
H
xxx
j
xxo
j
-xx
j
xxo
H
xxx
H
xxx
k
xxo
k
--o
j
xxx
j
-xx
H
xxx
adaptor to connect temporary peripheral equipment (camcorder, digital camera, game boy, etc.) to EXTERNAL 3. Note: do not connect the CVBS and Y/C connector of one device at the same time.
Aerial - In
- IEC-type Coax, 75 ohm D
LED / SWITCH PANEL
LD
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
A
PANEL
EMC FILTER
EMC
SMALL SIGNAL
B
PANEL
TOP CONTROL
PANEL
PLASMA DISPLAY PANEL
CL 36532075_057.eps
P
241103
Figure 1-4 Chassis Overview
Page 4
EN 4 FTP1.1E2.
Safety Instructions, Warnings, and Notes

2. Safety Instructions, Warnings, and Notes

2.1 Safety Instructions

Safety regulations require that during a repair:
Connect the set to the mains via an isolation transformer (>
800 VA).
Replace safety components, indicated by the symbol h,
only by components identical to the original ones. Any other component substitution (other than original type) may increase risk of fire or electrical shock hazard.
Safety regulations require that after a repair, the set must be returned in its original condition. Pay in particular attention to the following points:
Route the wire trees correctly and fix them with the
mounted cable clamps.
Check the insulation of the mains lead for external
damage.
Check the strain relief of the mains cord for proper function.
Check the electrical DC resistance between the mains plug
and the secondary side (only for sets which have a mains isolated power supply):
1. Unplug the mains cord and connect a wire between the two pins of the mains plug.
2. Set the mains switch to the "on" position (keep the mains cord unplugged!).
3. Measure the resistance value between the pins of the mains plug and the metal shielding of the tuner or the aerial connection on the set. The reading should be between 4.5 Mohm and 12 Mohm.
4. Switch "off" the set, and remove the wire between the two pins of the mains plug.
Check the cabinet for defects, to avoid touching of any inner parts by the customer.

2.2 Warnings

All ICs and many other semiconductors are susceptible to electrostatic discharges (ESD w). Careless handling during repair can reduce life drastically. Make sure that, during repair, you are connected with the same potential as the mass of the set by a wristband with resistance. Keep components and tools also at this same potential. Available ESD protection equipment: – Complete kit ESD3 (small tablemat, wristband,
connection box, extension cable and earth cable) 4822 310 10671.
Wristband tester 4822 344 13999.
Be careful during measurements in the high voltage
section.
Never replace modules or other components while the unit is switched "on".
When you align the set, use plastic rather than metal tools. This will prevent any short circuits and the danger of a circuit becoming unstable.
– Complete kit ESD3 (small tablemat, wristband,
connection box, extension cable and ground cable) 4822 310 10671.
Wristband tester 4822 344 13999.
Never replace modules or other components while the unit
is 'on’.
Measure the voltages and waveforms with regard to the
chassis (= tuner) ground (H), or hot ground (I), depending on the tested area of circuitry. The voltages and waveforms shown in the diagrams are indicative. Measure them in the Service Default Mode (see chapter 5) with a colour bar signal and stereo sound (L: 3 kHz, R: 1 kHz unless stated otherwise) and picture carrier at 475.25 MHz (PAL) or
61.25 MHz (NTSC, channel 3).
Where necessary, measure the waveforms and voltages
with (D) and without (E) aerial signal. Measure the voltages in the power supply section both in normal operation (G) and in standby (F). These values are indicated by means of the appropriate symbols.
The semiconductors indicated in the circuit diagram and in the parts lists, are interchangeable per position with the semiconductors in the unit, irrespective of the type indication on these semiconductors.

2.3.2 Schematic Notes

All resistor values are in ohms and the value multiplier is often used to indicate the decimal point location (e.g. 2K2 indicates 2.2 kohm).
Resistor values with no multiplier may be indicated with either an "E" or an "R" (e.g. 220E or 220R indicates 220 ohm).
All capacitor values are expressed in micro-farads (µ= x10^-6), nano-farads (n= x10^-9), or pico-farads (p= x10^-
12).
Capacitor values may also use the value multiplier as the decimal point indication (e.g. 2p2 indicates 2.2 pF).
An "asterisk" (*) indicates component usage varies. Refer to the diversity tables for the correct values.
The correct component values are listed in the Electrical Replacement Parts List. Therefore, always check this list when there is any doubt.

2.3 Notes

2.3.1 General

In order to prevent damage to ICs and transistors, avoid all high voltage flashovers.
All ICs and many other semiconductors are susceptible to electrostatic discharges (ESD, w). Careless handling during repair can reduce life drastically. Make sure that, during repair, you are connected with the same potential as the mass of the set by a wristband with resistance. Keep components and tools also at this potential. Available ESD protection equipment:
Page 5

3. Directions for Use

33
213
546
879
0
B
v
®
Ò
‡π
æ b
Ï
i
VCR DVD AMP
¬V PP
0
PIXEL
PLUS
OK
MENU
U
Q
Ì
hb
S
q
SAT
i
®Ò‡π†
Audio- and Video equipment keys
(p. 21)
® Record
See Record with your recorder
with EasyLink, p. 21
U Time display
The time is displayed on the
screen.
æ
NEX
TV
IEW
on/off p. 13
OK
Press this key
• to activate your choice, when in the
menus.
• to display the programme list.
V
To adjust the volume.¬Interrupt the sound or restore
it.
i On Screen information
Press to display (when available)
information about the selected
TV channel and programme.
Menu/Remote control info
When a menu is on screen, press
i
to display info on the
selected menu item. For
information on the remote
control functions, while the
menu info is displayed, press any
key on the remote control.
The normal function of the key is
not executed.
vSelect peripherals
(p. 18)
VCR DVD AMP SAT
Audio- and Video equipment keys
(p. 21)
QSurround mode
Incredible surround
With stereo transmission, and
when Incredible surround is
selected, it seems as though the
loudspeakers are spread further
apart from one another.
Virtual Dolby surround
Optimal with Dolby surround
signals. Enables you to experience
the effect of Dolby surround Pro
Logic, reproducing a rear sound
effect. See Sound menu, 3D effect,
p. 11.
Note:You can make the same
selection in the Sound menu,
surround mode, p. 11.
ÌCinema Go
See separate Cinema Link booklet
supplied.
PIXEL PLUS
no function
bTeletext
on/off p. 15
Ï
Main menu see p. 5
P Programme selection
To browse through the TV
channels and sources stored in
the favourite list.
0/9 Digit keys
To select a TV channel.
For a two digit programme
number,enter the second digit
within 2 seconds.To switch
immediately to a selected one
digit TV channel, keep the digit key
pressed a bit longer.
Use of the remote control RC2080
Note: For most keys pressing a key once will activate the function. Pressing a second time will de-activate it.
When a key enables multiple options, a small list will be shown. Press repeatedly to select the next item in the list.
The list will be removed automatically after 4 seconds or press
OK
to remove immediately.
Remark: in VGA mode only some keys are valid.
B Standby
Press to switch the TV on or off.
When switched off, a red indicator on
the TV lights up.When acquiring
NEX
TV
IEW
, see p. 14,an orange
indicator lights up and after a period
of max. 1 hour the TV is switched to
full standby and the red indicator
lights up.
1m
m
in
.
MENU/OK - V + - P/CH +
Directions for Use
EN 5FTP1.1E 3.
To connect your computer, see p. 20.
To connect other peripherals, see p. 17.
Wall mounting instructions
Preparation
&
For the wall mounting instructions follow the
If you dispose of a Cinema Link combination
(Cinema Link Audio receiver and/or Cinema
Link video recorder and/or DVD player), see
the separate supplied instruction manual.
In order to obtain the best result, please use
only the supplied antenna cables between the
TV and videorecorder, and between
videorecorder and antenna connector.(Insert the mains cord supplied into the mains
at the bottom of the TV and in the wall socket
having a mains voltage of 220-240V.
To prevent damaging the power (AC) cord
which could cause a fire or electric shock, do
not place the TV on the cord.
separate template.
Make sure that the wall mount is being fixed
securely enough so that it meets safety
standards.The weight of the TV (excl.
packaging) is about 35 kg.
How to mount the supplied stand, see the
separate leaflet.
Note: other (not supplied) stands are optional
accessories. Consult your dealer.éPlace or hang the TV wherever you want, but
make sure that air can circulate freely through
the ventilation slots. Do not install the TV in a
confined space such as a book case or a
simular unit.
: Insert the 2 batteries
supplied (Type R6-1,5V).
Remote control
§
: Press the power switch B
The batteries supplied do not contain the heavy
metals mercury and cadmium. Please check on how
to dispose of exhausted batteries according to local
regulations.
Switch the TV on
è
To prevent any unsafe situations, no naked
flame sources, such as lighted candles, should
be placed on or in the vicinity.Avoid heat,
direct sunlight and exposure to rain or water.
The equipment shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and no objects filled with
liquids, such as vases,shall be placed on it.
keys or the B
-P+
at the right side of the TV.
An indicator on the front of the TV lights up
and the screen comes on. If the TV is in
standby mode, press the
key on the remote control.
Insert the aerial plug firmly into the aerial
socket x at the bottom of the TV. For best
picture quality use the suppressor-aerial cable
supplied.
Should your remote be lost or broken you can still
Keys on top of the TV
key to adjust the volume;
+
or
-
of your TV.
Press:
• the V
change some of the basic settings with the keys on top
keys
P/CH+
and
P/CH-
Use:
• the V - and + keys and the
key to confirm your selection.
MENU/OK
to select menu items in the directions as shown;
• the
Picture Sound Features
TV
Setup
key can be used to summon the main
keys to select the TV channels or sources.
-P/CH+ MENU/OK
• the
menu without the remote control.
The
key.
key on top of the TV,
MENU/OK
MENU/OK
and press the
Exit
lets you dismiss the menu.
Exit
only
Navigate to
Note:
When activated via the
Exit
2
Install
Demo
Page 6
EN 6 FTP1.1E3.
5
To use the menus
&
Press the
MENU
Ï key on the remote control to summon
the main menu.At any moment you can exit the menu by
pressing the
MENU
Ï key again.
Note: If you have connected equipment with Cinema Link, more
menu items are present.
é
Use the cursor in the up/down direction to select the
TV
,
Setup
,
Demo
or
Install
menu.
Use the cursor left/right to select
Picture
,
Sound
or
Features
.
Note: Sometimes not all the menu items are visible on the screen
(indicated by a cluster of blue balls). Use the cursor down or right
to reveal all items.
Use the cursor in the left/right direction to select the menu
item.‘Use the cursor up/down again to select the control you
want to select or to adjust.
Note: Items temporary not available or not relevant are displayed
in a light grey colour and cannot be selected.
213
B
v
®
Ò
‡π
æ b
Ï
VCR DVD AMP SAT
¬V
PIXEL
PLUS
OK
MENU
U
Q
Ì
PP
cursor to select
adjustments
OK
key to
activate
return or switch
main menu on/off
TV
Setup
Demo
Install
Picture Sound Features
Press the
i
key to get
information about the selected
menu item.
Installation
& Press the
MENU
Ï key on the remote control.
é
Use the cursor down to select
Install
.
Use the cursor right to select
Language
.
Follow the instructions on screen.
Use the cursor up/down to select your preferred language
and press the
OK
key to confirm your selection.
(
Use the cursor right to select
Country
.
§
Select the country where you are now located and press the
OK
key.
Select
Other
when none of the countries applies.
è
Proceed with the
Install
menu.
Install
Language Country Automatic Manual Give name Reshuffle Favourite
install install programmes
The installation menu contains the following items:
EasyLink
If your video recorder has an EasyLink function, during installation, the language, country and available channels are
automatically transmitted to the video recorder.
Language
English
Deutsch
Français
Install
Country
Austria
Belgium
Croatia
Install
Select the menu language and country
4
213
546
879
0
B
v
®
Ò
‡π
æ b
Ï
i
VCR DVD AMP
¬V
P
P
0
PIXEL
PLUS
OK
MENU
U
Q
Ì
hb
S
q
SAT
0 Previous TV channel
Press to display the previously selected TV channel.bno functionhActive control see p. 11
qPicture format
Press this key repeatedly or press the cursor up/down to select another
picture format:Auto format, Super zoom, 4:3, Movie Expand 14:9, Movie
Expand 16:9, Subtitle zoom or Wide screen.
Auto format makes the picture fill the screen as much as possible.
In case of subtitles in the bottom black bar,Auto format makes the
subtitles visible. If subtitles are only partly visible, press cursor up.
In case of a broadcaster logo in the corner of the top black bar, the logo
disappears from the screen.
Super zoom removes the black bars on the sides of 4:3 programs with
minimal distortion.
When in Movie Expand 14:9, 16:9,Super zoom or Subtitle zoom picture
format, you can make subtitles visible with the cursor up/down.
Note: With signals via the
VGA IN
connector less picture formats are
selectable.
S Freeze
To freeze the picture.
Dependent on the input signal, the function may not be possible.
Auto format Super zoom 4:3 Movie Expand 14:9
Movie Expand 16:9 Subtitle zoom Wide screen
Directions for Use
Page 7
Directions for Use
It is possible to change the name stored in the
memory or to assign a name to a TV channel or
external for which a name has not yet been
entered.A name with up to 5 letters or numbers
can be given to the programme numbers 0 to 99.
Note : It is not possible to rename the VGA source.
&
Select
Give Name
in the Install menu and
press the cursor down.
é
Select the programme number.
Note: keep the cursor up/down pressed to scroll
through the programme list quickly.“Press the cursor right.
A keyboard appears on the screen.
Press the cursor right to enter the keyboard.
Press the cursor up/down, left/right to select
the first character and press
OK
. Repeat for
every character you want to enter.
Select
Space
to enter a space;
Delete
to erase
the highlighted character in the name entered;
Shift
to display upper- or lowercase characters
on the keyboard;
Special
to display special
characters on the keyboard. Press
OK
to
confirm.
Press the cursor left repeatedly when you have
finished the name giving.
(
Select another programme number and repeat
steps
to
.
7
Give name
® Space ® Delete
ABCDEFG 123
HIJKLMN 456
OPQRSTU 789
VWXYZ 0
® Shift ® Special
Give name
Install
VCR1
BBC1
BBC2
CNN
TVE
.....
Reshuffle the programme list
You can change the order of the stored TV
channels.
&
Select
Reshuffle
in the Installation menu.
é
Follow the instructions on screen.
Select Favourite TV channels
A VGA source always belongs to the list of
Favourite programmes
.
&
Select
Favourite programmes
in the Install
menu.
é
Select your programme number with the
cursor up/down.
Select
Ye s
or
No
with the cursor right.
Repeat
é
and
for every TV channel or
external you want to make a favourite or a
non-favourite TV channel or external.
TV Setup
The Setup menu contains items that control the settings
of the TV’s functions, features, services and peripherals
you may have connected.
The
General
menu allows you to change settings that
will typically be accessed only occasionally.
The
Source
menu allows you to select a source.
The
Decoder
menu allows you to define one or more
programme numbers as decoder programme numbers.
General
Menu background
Factory settings
NEX
TV
IEW
provider
OSD
Programme title
Teletext level 2.5
Auto surround
Set/Change code
Setup
EN 7FTP1.1E 3.
Store TV channels
in the Install menu.
Automatic install
Note: All channels must be unlocked in order to autoprogram. If
Select
&
After language and country are set correctly, you can now search for and store the TV channels in two
different ways: using Automatic Installation or Manual Installation (tuning-in channel by channel).
Select your choice with the cursor right.
Automatic installation
appears.
Start
Press the cursor down.
The autoprogramming option label
requested, enter your code to unlock all channels. (See TV, Features
menu, Childlock, p. 12.)
é
Automatic install
Install
appears and the progress of
Searching
autoprogramming is displayed.
Press the cursor right.
The message
If a cable system or a TV channel which broadcasts ACI
(Automatic Channel Installation) is detected, a programme list
Install Star t
appears.Without ACI broadcast,the channels are numbered
according your language and country selection.You can use
Reshuffle to renumber them. See p. 7.
It is possible that the cable company or the TV channel displays a
broadcast selection menu. Layout and items are defined by the cable
company or the TV channel. Make your choice with the cursor and
key.
OK
press the
Searching for and storing TV channels is done channel by
Manual installation
in the Install menu.
Manual install
Note: If requested, enter your code to unlock all channels.
(See TV, Features menu, Childlock, p. 12.)
Select
Press the cursor down.
channel.You must go through every step of the Manual
Installation menu.
&
é
Selection mode
System
Programme
Install
Manual install
Follow the instructions on screen.
Note: Search or direct selection of a TV channel.
If you know the frequency, the C- or S-channel number, enter the 3
or 2 digits of the frequency or the channel number directly with
the digit keys 0 to 9 (e.g. 048). Press the cursor down to proceed.
Repeat to search for another TV channel.
Search
Fine tune
Store
6
Page 8
EN 8 FTP1.1E3.
9
Source
This menu allows you to indicate the peripheral
you connected to one of the external inputs.
&
Press the cursor right to enter the list of types
of peripherals attached to the selected input.
é
Select the peripheral device with the cursor
up/down.
Once you have selected the source type, e.g. DVD,
this source will automatically be selected when
your remote control is in DVD mode, see p.3, and
when you press the v key on the remote
control.
Centre input - Centre in volume
When you have connected a surround receiver
to the TV, see p. 18, the loudspeakers of the TV
can act as centre speaker, making a separate
centre speaker unnecessary.
Select
Centre input On
or
Cinema Link
(in
case you have connected a Cinema Link
Surround receiver).
When having selected
On
you can adjust the
Centre in volume with the cursor left/right to
correct volume level differences of the external
audio receiver and speakers.
Note:This is not the case with a Cinema Link
surround receiver.
Source
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
YPbPr
Centre input
Centre in volume
Setup
If a decoder or a descrambler is connected, see
p. 17, you can define one or more programme
numbers as decoder programme numbers.
&
Select
Decoder
with the cursor right.
é
Select
Programme
.
Select the programme number under which
you have stored the programme coming from
your decoder.‘Select
Status
.
• Select the input used to connect your
decoder:
None
,
EXT1
or
EXT2
.
• Select
None
if you do not want the selected
programme number being activated as a
decoder programme number.
Note: Select
EXT2
when the decoder is connected to
your EasyLink video recorder.
Decoder
Decoder
Programme
Status
Setup
Demo
The Demo menu allows to demonstrate the TV
features separately or in a continuous loop.
If
Auto demo
has been selected the demo will
automatically present the features sequentially in a
loop. Press one of the cursor keys to stop the Auto
demo.
If one of the features has been selected, this
particular feature demo will run only once, and the
Demo menu will reappear.
Note:The Dealer demo is not par t of the automatic
sequence and can only be activated separately.
Auto demo
......
Dealer demo - Dig natural motion
- Light sensor
- Comb filter
TV
Setup
Demo
Install
8
General
Menu background
Select
Ye s
or
No
to turn the menu background
on or off.
Factory settings
This resets the picture and sound settings to
their predefined factory values, but maintains
the channel installation settings.
NEX
TV
IEW
provider
Select a TV broadcaster that provides
NEX
TV
IEW
data. How to make use of
NEX
TV
IEW
,
see p. 13.
OSD (On Screen Display)
See Use of the remote control, p. 3, i On
screen information.
&
Select
OSD
.
é
Select
Normal
to activate the continuous
display of the programme number. Also TV
channel and programme information are
extended.
Minimum
will display reduced
channel information.
Note: When subtitles is switched on, see Features,
p.12, continuous display of the programme number
is not possible.
Programme title
Select
Programme title Yes
or
No
.
When selected
Ye s
, after the selection of a TV
programme or after pressing the i key on
the remote control, a TV channel which
broadcasts teletext may transmit the name of
the TV channel or the programme title.
When selected
No
, the programme title will
only appear after pressing the i key, and not
after the selection of a TV channel.
Teletext level 2.5
Some broadcasters offer the opportunity to see
more colours, other background colours and
nicer pictures in the teletext pages.
&
Select
Teletext level 2.5
.
é
Press the cursor right to select
Teletext level
2.5 On
to take advantage of this feature.
Press the cursor right again to select
Teletext
level 2.5 Off
if you like the more neutral
teletext layout.
The selection made is valid for all channels
which broadcast teletext level 2.5.
Note: It may take a few seconds before teletext
broadcast switches over to Teletext level 2.5.
Auto Surround
Sometimes the broadcaster transmits special
signals for Surround Sound encoded
programmes.
The TV automatically switches to the best
surround sound mode when
Auto Surround
is
switched
On
.
Set/Change code
The Child lock feature (see TV, Features, p. 12)
allows you to lock channels to prevent others
from watching certain programmes.To watch
locked channels, a 4-digit code must be entered.
The Set/Change code menu item allows you to
create or change a Personal Identification
Number (PIN).
&
Select
Set/Change code
.
é
If no code exists yet, the menu item is set to
Set code.
If a code has previously been entered, the menu
item is set to
Change code
. Follow the
instructions on screen.
Important:You have forgotten your code !
&
Select
Change code
in the General menu and
press
OK
.
é
Press the cursor right and enter the overriding
code 8-8-8-8.
Press the cursor again and enter a new
personal 4-digit code.The previous code is
erased and the new code is stored.
This menu allows you to change various settings that are presumably adjusted less frequently than
most other settings.
Press the
i
key on the remote control to get information about the selected menu item.
Directions for Use
Page 9
Directions for Use
11
The TV continuously measures and corrects all
incoming signals in order to provide the best
picture possible.
&
Press the h key on the remote control.éThe Active Control menu appears.“Press the cursor up/down to select the Active
Control values
Off
,
Minimum
,
Medium
(recommended) or
Maximum
.
The picture settings are being optimised
continuously and automatically which is
displayed by bars.The menu items can not be
selected.
Press the cursor right to select
Smart
Picture
.
(
Press the cursor up/down to select one of the
predefined picture settings.
§
Press the cursor right to select
Active
Display
.
è
Press the cursor up/down to select
Show bars
,
one of the Dual screen demos or
Off
.
When you select Dynamic contrast, Digital
Noise Reduction or Digital Natural Motion, the
TV screen is divided into two parts: in the left
part the selected picture quality setting is
switched off; in the right part it is switched on.
Note: Dependent on the input signal, one or more
Dual screen demos may not be selectable.
!
Press the h key again to switch off the Active
Control menu.
Active Control
&
Press the cursor right to select
Sound
.
é
Select the menu items in the Sound menu with the cursor
up/down and adjust the settings with the cursor
left/right.Remember,control settings are at normal mid-range
levels when the bar scale is centred.
Smart sound
Select
Smart sound
to display a list of predefined sound
settings, each corresponding with specific factory settings of
Treble and Bass.
Personal
refers to the personal preference
settings of sound in the sound menu.
Notes:
- Some menu items are only available in case of a Cinema Link
configuration and when the Cinema Link is activated. Others are
steered by the audio receiver instead of by the TV. See the separate
Cinema Link booklet supplied.
- Dual X is only available with dual sound transmission.
- Mono/Stereo is only selectable in case of analogue stereo
transmission.
- Nicam/Analogue is only selectable in case of Nicam transmission.
Sound
Smart sound
Equalizer
Volume
Balance
Loudness
Headphone volume
Surround mode
(Dual I-II)
(Mono/Stereo)
(Nicam/Analogue)
(3D effect)
AVL
Delta volume
TV
Sound
OffOnOn during mute
Features
Programme list
Subtitle
Sleeptimer
Child lock
On timer
Zoom
TV
Features menu
&
Press the cursor right to select
Features
.
é
Select the menu items with the cursor
up/down and adjust the settings with the
cursor left/right.
Use the on-screen Menu-Info
i
for more
information about the menu items.
EN 9FTP1.1E 3.
Ï key on the remote control to summon the main menu.
MENU
TV menu
Press the
Picture Sound Features
TV
Picture menu
Note: Dependent on the input signal, one or more menu items may not be selectable.
Press the i key on the remote control to get information about the selected menu item.
.
Picture
to display a list of predefined picture
to really see the difference in picture quality.
Off
refers to the personal preference settings of picture in
Smart picture
the picture menu.
Press the cursor right to select
Select the menu items in the Picture menu with the cursor
up/down.“Adjust the settings with the cursor left/right or enter the list of
submenu items with the cursor right. Select a submenu item
with the cursor up/down.
Note:To remove the menu background before adjusting the picture
&
é
settings, each corresponding with specific factory settings.
settings, see Select TV setup, General, p. 7.
Select
Personal
Smart picture
Dig natural motion
or
On
Line doubling eliminates line flicker, motion compensation
reduces jitter and offers smooth, yet sharp motion reproduction
in movie broadcasts.
Select
Tint
DNR
Colour
Brightness
Sharpness
Contrast
Smart picture
(Hue)
Picture format
Dynamic contrast
Dig natural motion
Colour enhancement
Sets the level at which the TV automatically enhances the details
in dark, middle and light areas of the picture.
This sets the level at which noise is measured and reduced in
the picture.
Dynamic contrast
DNR
Colour enhancement
This makes the colours more vivid and improves the resolution
of details in bright colours.
This compensates for the colour variations in NTSC encoded
transmissions.
This will adjust the size of the picture dependent on the
broadcast format and your preferred setting.
Hue
Picture format
10
Page 10
EN 10 FTP1.1E3.
1313
NEX
TV
IEW
/ Teletext guide
NEX
TV
IEW
is an electronic guide that allows you to look up programmes as you would in a
newspaper or a TV magazine.You can sort the programmes by subject (films, sport...), obtain
detailed information and programme your video recorder if it comes with the
NEX
TV
IEW
Link
function.
Important note: The
NEX
TV
IEW
service is only available on certain programmes and in certain
countries. When no
NEX
TV
IEW
information is broadcast, the teletext programme guide appears in its place.This is
based on teletext programme information (if available) and offers most functions of
NEX
TV
IEW
.
Note:The broadcaster is responsible for the content of the information.
Call NEXTVIEW / Teletext guide
Press the æ key on the remote control to call the
NEX
TV
IEW
/Teletext guide.A menu appears with
the message
One moment please
.After a while you obtain:
•a
NEX
TV
IEW
page, if the selected channel broadcasts this service (the
NEX
TV
IEW
logo is displayed),
• a teletext page, if the selected channel does not broadcast
NEX
TV
IEW
,
No information available
is displayed if neither
NEX
TV
IEW
nor teletext are transmitted. In this case,
select another channel.
Display of a
NEX
TV
IEW
page
The information is set by the channel that transmits the
NEX
TV
IEW
service. See also Setup menu,
General,
NEX
TV
IEW
provider, p. 8.
This logo is only displayed
during a
NEX
TV
IEW
transmission or when one
of the externals is selected.
No logo indicates a teletext
programme guide
Programme name and
broadcast time
Review Record Remind Watch Lock
Mon 03
Mon 03
Tue 04
Wed 05
Thu 06
Fri 07
Sat 08
puck
function keys
NEX
TV
IEW
guides
BBC1 18.00 BBC News
BBC2 18.00 The Simpsons
CNN 18.00 World News
FR2 18.00 On a tout essayé!
CH5 18.15 Tomorrow Never Dies
Menu 18.00 Channel Theme
Mon
05
Feb
18.00
NEXTVIEW guides
&
Use the cursor key left/right to select
Time
,
Channel
,
Theme
, the
Date
guide (or menu).
The
Time guide
provides an overview of all programme titles active in the selected time block.The
Channel guide
provides an overview of all programmes that are broadcast by a single channel during
one day. With the
Date guide
you can choose a specific date.The
Theme guide
displays a list of all
programmes at the selected date, that matches with the selected category.
Going through the menu guide, the TV is collecting the sorting criteria to finally display a list of
programme events.
é
Press the OK key to select the guide type.“Move the puck down and to the right to select the programmes.
If available a summary or commentary on the programme is displayed at the bottom of the screen.‘Use the cursor up/down to scroll through the programmes.
12
Programme list
Press the
OK
key to switch over to the
selected TV channel or external.
Select subtitles
The subtitle page must be stored for each TV
channel:
Switch on teletext and select the proper
subtitle page from the index. Switch off
teletext.
Subtitle On
will automatically display them on
the selected TV channels if subtitles are in the
transmission.A symbol will indicate that the
mode is on.
Select
On during mute
when you want to
have the subtitles automatically displayed only
when the sound has been muted with the ¬
key on the remote control.
Child lock
Note: A VGA source can not be locked.
&
Select
Child lock
.
é
Press the cursor right to enter the Child lock
menu.You’re summoned to enter your code.
Note:You have to re-enter your code each time you
enter the child lock menu.
Important:You have forgotten your code !
See p. 8.
Select one of the menu items of the child lock
menu:
Lock
if you want to lock all channels and
externals.
Custom lock
and press the cursor right.
The items Age lock and Category lock are only
available when
NEX
TV
IEW
broadcast is available.
Select:
-
Age lock
if you want to lock programmes
related to a certain age: off,2, 4 ... 18;
-
Lock after
if you want to lock all
programmes from a certain time onwards.
Press the cursor right and enter the time
with the cursor up/down and right. Press the
OK
key to validate.
-
Programme lock
if you want to lock a
certain TV channel or external;
-
Category lock
if you want to lock
programmes related to a certain theme:
Movies, Sports, Shows....
• Select
Unlock
to disable all locks you have set.
On timer
&
Select
On timer
with the cursor down.
é
Select
On
with the cursor right.
Press the cursor right again to enter the
programme list.
Select the TV channel or external you want
your TV to switch to on a selected time and
day.(Press the cursor right again to select a day of
the week or to select
Daily
.
§
Press the cursor right once again to enter the
time with the digit keys or with the cursor
up/down and press the
OK
key to activate.
è
Press the
MENU
Ï key to turn off the menu.
Note:To check your timer settings, press the i
key.
Zoom
Note: Dependent on the input signal, Zoom may not be
selectable.
&
Select
Zoom
with the cursor down and press
the
OK
key.
é
Press the
OK
key to select one of the zoom
magnifications (x1, x4,x9, x16).
Additionally you can shift the selected zoom
window over the screen with the cursor keys
up/down, left/right.‘Press the
MENU
Ï key to turn off the zoom
function.
VCR1
BBC2
CNN
TVE
π.....
Sunday
Monday
.......
Daily
15:45
On timer
Off
On
Child lock
Lock
Custom lock
Unlock
Age lock
Lock after
Programme lock
Category lock
Directions for Use
Page 11
Directions for Use
1515
Switch Teletext on and off
Press b to switch the teletext on.
Select a Teletext page
- Enter the desired page number with the digit
keys, the cursor keys up/down or with the -P+
key.
- Select the options at the bottom of the screen
with the colour keys.
Previously selected teletext page
(Only possible in case there is no list of favourite
teletext pages available. See p. 16.)
Press the 0 key.
Select the index teletext page
Press the grey colour key to display the
main index (usually p.100).
Only for T.O.P teletext broadcasts:
Press i. A T.O.P. overview of the teletext
subjects available is displayed.
Select with the cursor up/down, left/right the
desired subject and press the
OK
key.
Not all TV channels broadcast T.O.P. teletext.
Select subpages
When a selected teletext page consists of
different subpages, a list of available subpages
appears on the screen.
Press the cursor left or right to select the next
or previous subpage.
Enlarge a Teletext page
Press q repeatedly to display the upper
teletext part, the lower teletext part and then
to return to the normal teletext page size.
When the teletext page is enlarged, you can
scroll the text, line by line using the cursor
up/down.
Hypertext
With hypertext you can quickly jump to a
pagenumber or search for a specific word
shown on the current teletext page.
& Press the
OK
key to highlight the first word or
a number on the page.
é
Use the cursor up/down, left/right to select any
other word or number you want to search for.“Press the
OK
key to confirm.The search starts.
A message appears at the bottom of the screen
to indicate the searching, or that the word or
page is not found.
Use the cursor up to exit hypertext.
Most TV channels broadcast information via teletext.This TV has a 1200 pages memory that will store
most broadcasted pages and subpages to reduce waiting time. After each programme change, the
memory is refreshed.
Teletext
LIONS RECORD ANOTHER WIN 430
Index 100 News 300
BBC Info 110 Headlines 305
Children 120 Weather 400
Cookery 150 Sports 415
Education 200 Radio 500
Lottery 230 Travel 550
Finance 240 Subtitling 888
Music 280 TV Listings 600
Red Green Yellow Blue
102 «03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12»
BBC CEEFAX 102 Mon 05 Feb 16.35.22
BBC CEEFAX
EN 11FTP1.1E 3.
subpages
Mon 05 Feb 16.35
Enter with the digit keys, the teletext page number that contains the programme information for the
current channel.
Teletext Guide
&
page ball
selection ball
Press the cursor right to move the puck over the selection ball.
Use the cursor up/down to scroll through the different programmes.
é
scroll ball
100 1
BBC CEEFAX
BBC1
BBC2
LIONS RECORD ANOTHER WIN 430
Index 100 News 300
BBC Info 110 Headlines 305
ITV
CH4
CH5
Children 120 Weather 400
Cookery 150 Sports 415
Education 200 Radio 500
Review Record Remind Watch Lock
channel list
key again
OK
key to display the information.Press the
OK
to return to the programme guide page.
more info about the programme, press the
- it will be possible to record, remind, watch or lock programmes:
• If the selected programme guide page satisfies the VPT requirements,
• If the selected programme contains a page number with an optional subcode referring to a page with
pressing right.
Note:You must enter the teletext pagenumber for each channel.You can change the channels also by moving
guide information and indicates which programme starts at what time. Every time you press the æ
key, the teletext programme guide page of the selected TV channel will be available.
- the TV will remember the last selected teletext page number of that channel that contains programme
the cursor up/down in the list in the left of the page.
• When necessary you can select the subpage number by moving the cursor to the pageball and
function.The keys appear in grey if the function is not available.
: this menu provides a list of programmes that are marked as reminders, those that have to be
recorded and those that are locked.This menu can be used to change or remove marked
Review
Link function and is
IEW
TV
NEX
: to programme the recording of the video recorder (if it has a
programmes.
Record
or Teletext Guide
IEW
TV
NEX
Press one of the grey, red, green, yellow or blue keys to activate a
Basic functions
).
EXT. 2
: automatically switch on the TV if it is in standby or by displaying a message if the TV is on.
: to lock certain programmes to prevent recording or watching.
connected to
For the functions Record, Remind or Lock, a small menu pops up in which you can choose the
interval: once, daily or weekly, or clear an earlier made record, remind or lock setting. The default
Remind
Lock
key.
OK
.To confirm the frequency, press the
Once
: to watch the selected and currently broadcast programme.
interval is set to
Watch
Acquisition and updating of NEXTVIEW information
information is outdated, e.g. when
IEW
TV
NEX
is done when you are watching the TV channel of the selected
IEW
TV
NEX
provider, see Setup menu, p. 8, or when the TV is switched to standby;
IEW
TV
Acquisition of fresh data will happen once during the night.
Note: it may be necessary to put the TV in standby mode when all
Acquisition and updating of
NEX
returning from holiday.
1414
Page 12
EN 12 FTP1.1E3.
17
There is a wide range of audio and video equipment that can be connected to your TV.
The following connection diagrams show you how to connect them.
Note:
EXT 1
can handle CVBS and RGB;
EXT 2
CVBS, Y/C and RGB;
EXT 3
CVBS and Y/C;
YPbPr
Y-Pb-Br 480p,
576p, 1080i;
VGA IN
can hancle VGA, SVGA and 480p, 576p, 1080i.
It is preferred to connect peripherals with RGB output to
EXT 1
or
EXT 2
as RGB provides a better picture quality.
Note: If your recorder is provided with the EasyLink function, it should be connected to
EXT 2
to benefit from the
EasyLink functionality.
Recorder (VCR-DVD +RW)
Note: Do not place your recorder too close to the screen as some recorders may be susceptible for signals out of the
display. Keep a minimum distance of 0,5 m to the screen.
RRPr
Pb
Y
EXT1EXT3
LL
VGA
CENTRE
IN
EXT2
VCR 1 DECODER
4
3
2
CABLE
1
RRPr
Pb
Y
LL
VGA
CENTRE
IN
EXT2
CABLE
1
2
VCR 1
4
3
5
Connect Peripheral Equipment
Connect the aerial cables 1, 2 and, to obtain the
optimum picture quality, eurocable 3 as shown.
If your recorder does not have a euroconnector, the
only possible connection is via the aerial cable.You will
therefore need to tune in your recorder’s test signal and
assign it programme number 0 or store the test signal
under a programme number between 90 and 99, see
Manual installation, p. 6.
See the handbook of your recorder.
Decoder and Recorder
Connect a eurocable 4 to your decoder and to the
special euroconnector of your recorder. See also the
recorder handbook. See Decoder, p. 9. You can also
connect your decoder directly to
EXT1
or
2
with a
eurocable.
Other equipment
(satellite receiver, decoder, DVD, games, etc.)
&
Connect the aerial cables 1, 2 and 3 as shown
(only if your peripheral has TV aerial in-/output).
Connect your equipment with a eurocable 4 or 5 to
one of the euroconnectors
EXT1
,
2
or
3
to obtain a
better picture quality.
é
Look for the test signal of your peripheral in the same
way as you do for a recorder.“Make a selection in the Setup, Source menu, p. 9.
R
L
VGA
CENTRE
IN
DVD
L
R
Y
Pb
Pr
1
Equipment with Component Video Output Connectors (
YPbPr
)
&
Connect the three separate component video cables
1 to the DVD player’s
Y
,
U
(Pb) and
V
(Pr) jacks and
to the Y, Pb and Pr jacks on the TV.
é
Connect the audio cable to the DVD player’s
AUDIO L
and
R
jacks and to the
L
and
R
audio
YPbPr
jacks on
the TV.
1616
Teletext menu
&
Press the
MENU
Ï key to activate the menu.
é
Press the cursor up/down to select the menu
items.“Press the cursor right to activate.
Reveal
Reveals/conceals hidden information on a page,
such as solutions to riddles and puzzles.
Press the cursor right to activate.
Favourite
This list contains up to eight favourite teletext
pages. Only the pages of the current channel
can be selected.
&
Press the cursor right to enter the list.
é
Press the cursor right again to add the current
page or to select one of the favourite pages to
the list.“Press the
MENU
Ï key to watch the page.
Use the 0 key to browse through the list of
favourite pages.
Search
Selecting a word
On the keyboard on screen you can type in a
random word you want to search for in the
teletext pages.Whether upper- or lowercase is
used has no influence.
&
Press the cursor right to enter the keyboard.éPress the cursor left/right, up/down to select
the characters, words or functions.
Press the
OK
key to confirm each character
selected.
Select
Cancel
to cancel the word;
Space
to
enter a space;
Delete
to delete the last
character selected;
Shift
to switch between
lowercase or capital characters;
Special
to
display special characters on the keyboard and
press the
OK
key.
(
Press the cursor left repeatedly to return to
the Teletext menu again.
Searching a word
&
Type in the word on screen or select a word
from the history list on the right and press
OK
.
é
Select
Accept
and press
OK
again.The message
Searching
appears.
To cancel the searching or to search for a new
word, select
Keyboard
and press
OK
.
When a word is not found, a message appears.
When the word is found, it is highlighted in the
teletext page.To continue the search, press the
OK
key.
Cycle subpages (if available)
Makes the subpages cycle automatically.
Press the cursor right to activate and to de-
activate again.
Timed page
To display a specific page from a selected TV
channel at a certain time.
&
Press the cursor right and select
Ye s
or
No
.
é
Enter the time and pagenumber with the cursor
keys or the digit keys.
Note:Teletext does not have to remain switched on,
but you should watch the TV channel you have
selected the specific page from.
Press the cursor left to return to the TV menu
again.
Language
If the displayed characters on screen do not
correspond with the characters used by the
teletext broadcaster, you can change the
language group here.
Select
Group 1
or
2
with the cursor right.
Press the
MENU
Ï key to leave the Teletext
menu.
102 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
TELETEXT
BBC1
Red Green Yellow Blue
puck
Cancel Accept
Space Delete
ABCDEFG 1 2 3
HIJKLMN 4 5 6
OP QRSTU 7 8 9
V W X Y Z 0
Shift Special
WORD
NAME
FOOTBALL
Directions for Use
Page 13
Directions for Use
19
See the separate supplied Cinema Link instruction manual.
Attention: the sound info on screen will not correspond with the actual sound reproduction.
Cinema Link surround receiver
OR
R
L
VGA
L
R
2
CENTRE IN
AUDIO
OUT
1
R
L
VGA
CENTRE
IN
EN 13FTP1.1E 3.
VCR
TV
CENTRE
EXT
IN
VCR
IN
TV
VGA
R
L
IN
2
3
Recorder
DVD/
2
1
CENTRE OUT
VCR
AUDIO
LINK
CINEMA
TV
CENTRE
EXT
TV
VCR
VGA
R
L
IN
2
3
Recorder
DVD/
2
1
AUDIO
CENTRE OUT
LINK
CINEMA
IN
IN
to adjust the
at the bottom of
Headphone volume
loudspeakers of the TV.
The headphone impedance must be between 8 and 4000 Ohm.The
headphone socket has a 3.5 mm jack.
In the Sound menu select
Insert the plug into the headphone socket L as shown.éPress ¬ on the remote control to switch off the internal
headphone volume.
&
at the bottom of your TV 1.
R
and
AUDIO OUT L
Connect the audio cable to the multi channel Surround receiver
and to
If you want the loudspeakers of your TV to act as centre
&
é
CENTRE IN
your TV 2.
speaker, also connect an audiocable to the multi channel
Surround receiver and to the
in the Source menu. See p. 9.
Centre Input On
The loudspeakers of the TV will now only produce centre
sound, the loudspeakers connected to the audio receiver will
Select
produce Surround Sound.The volume has to be controlled via
the multi channel Surround receiver.
Note: No sound will be heard when a TV channel or external source is
blocked via the Child lock menu (see p. 12).
according to where you connected your equipment.
VGA
or
YPbPr
,
EXT3
Headphone
Multi channel Surround receiver
,
EXT2
,
EXT1
Remark : Most equipment (decoder, recorder) carries out the switching itself, when it is switched on.
Press the v key on the remote control repeatedly, or select Source in the Setup menu (see p.9) to
select
To select connected equipment
18
Page 14
EN 14 FTP1.1E3.
21
Audio- and video equipment keys
Record with your recorder with EasyLink
Most of the audio and video equipment from our range of products can be
operated with the remote control of your TV.
Press one of the keys after you pressed the
VCR
,
DVD
,
AMP
or
SAT
key
repeatedly according to the equipment you want to operate with this
remote control. See Use of the remote control, p. 3.
213
546
879
0
B
v
®
Ò
‡π
æ b
Ï
i
VCR DVD AMP SAT
¬V PP
0
PIXEL
PLUS
OK
MENU
U
Q
Ì
hb
S
q
B to switch to standby
S for pause (
DVD
,
CD,VCR)
® for record
Ò for rewind (
VCR
,
CD
);
search down (
DVD
,
AMP
)
for stop
π for play
for fast forward (
VCR
,
CD
);
search up (
DVD/AMP
)
æ to select your choice of
subtitle language (
DVD
);
RDS news/TA (
AMP
);
to shuffle play (
CD
)
b to select a
DVD
title;
RDS display (
AMP
);
info on screen (
CD
)
i display information
Ï to switch the menu on or
off
- P +
for chapter, channel,track
selection
0 to 9 digit entr y
0 tape index (
VCR
),
select a DVD chapter,
select a frequency (
AMP
)
U VCR timer
Q surround on/off (
AMP
,
CD)
cursor up/down to select the
next or the previous disc
(
CD)
cursor left/right to select the
previous or following track
(
CD
);
to search up/down (
AMP
)
Note: When no action is under taken within 60 seconds, the remote control returns
to TV mode.
Submodes
The
SAT
mode can be customised according to the satellite receiver
you want to operate: with
RC6
or
RC5
signalling standard.
Within TV mode, press the
OK
key together with:
digit key 3 to select the
SAT RC-5
system
digit key 4 to select the
SAT RC-6
system.
In TV mode, it is possible to start a direct recording of the programme
which is being displayed on the TV screen.
Continue to press the ® record key on the remote control for more than
2 seconds.
Note:
Switching programme numbers on your TV does not disturb recording !
When recording a programme from a peripheral connected to
EXT. 1
,
EXT. 3
or
YPbPr
you can not select another TV programme on the screen.
20
Recorder or DVD with EasyLink
The recorder (VCR or DVD+RW) or DVD can
be operated with the remote control via the
Recorder
or
DVD
menu on screen.
&
Press the
MENU
Ï key on the remote
control.
é
Select the
Recorder
or
DVD
menu with the
cursor up/down.
Press the cursor left/right, up/down to select
one of the recorder or DVD functions.
The key ® for recording can be operated in the TV
mode.
If your EasyLink recorder has the system standby
function, when you press the B key for 3 seconds,
both TV and the recorder are switched to standby.
Ò p ‡ π † ® Ï
Rwd Play Stop Play Ffw Rec Eject
Recorder
Ò p ‡ π † Ï
Prev. Play Stop Play Next Eject
DVD
Connect your computer
R
L
R
L
CENTRE
IN
VGA
&
Connect one end of a VGA cable 1 to the video card
of the computer and the other end to the
VGA
connector at the bottom of the TV.
Fix the connectors firmly with the screws on the plug.
é
In case of a Multimedia computer,connect the audio
cable 2 to the audio outputs of your Multimedia
computer and to the
AUDIO R
(right) and
L
left)
inputs.
The
VGA IN
connector allows the following TV and
monitor display modes:
EDTV 640/720 x 480p
720 x 576p
HDTV 1920 x1080i
VGA 640 x 480 60 Hz
SVGA 800 x 600 56 Hz
1
2
Directions for Use
Page 15
Directions for Use
23
No Picture • Are the supplied cables connected properly ? (The aerial cable to the TV, the
other aerial to your recorder, the VGA cables to the display, the power cables.)
• Has the child lock been switched off ?
• Is your PC switched on ?
• Do you see a black screen and the indicator in front of the TV lights up green,
this means that the display mode is not supported. Switch your VGA-source to a
correct mode.
• In case of weak or bad signal, consult your dealer.
Digital distortion The low quality of some digital picture material may be the cause of digital image
distortion. In this case select the Soft setting using the Picture menu,Smart Picture,
without changing the picture settings manually.
No sound • No sound on any channel? Check the volume isn’t at minimum.
• Is the sound interrupted with the mute key
¬
?
No solution found Switch your TV off and then on again once. Never attempt to repair a defective
for your picture or TV yourself. Check with your dealer or call a TV technician.
sound problem ?
Menu Have you selected the wrong menu? Press the
MENU
Ï key
again to exit from the
menu.
NEX
TV
IEW
Orange indicator on front of the TV during standby / No
NEX
TV
IEW
info:
See Acquisition and updating of
NEX
TV
IEW
information, p. 14.
Displayed time is wrong:
The broadcaster on programme number one does not transmit the correct local
date and time. Use Reshuffle in the installation menu to place another broadcaster
on programme number one.
Remote control • Check if the remote control is in the correct mode.
• If your TV no longer responds to the remote control, the batteries may be dead.
• You can still use the
MENU/OK
key and the -/+ keys on top of your TV.
Standby Your TV consumes energy in the standby mode. Energy consumption contributes
to air and water pollution. Power consumption: 2 W.
No stable or not Check if you have selected the correct VGA mode in your PC. See the separate
synchronised VGA instruction manual with the monitor.
picture
Miscellaneous
. Ambient temperature: + 5~ + 40°C
. Maximum operating altitude: 2000 m / 6562 ft (min. air pressure 800 hPa)
. Mains: AC 95-264V 50/60 Hz
. Power consumption: around 290W
. Standby consumption: < 2W
. Weight (excl. packaging): Display: 35 kg
. Dimensions (wxhxd): 107 x 66 x 9 cm
. Wall mounting bracket included
EN 15FTP1.1E 3.
Do not hang up the monitor above a central heating or other heating sources.
Tips
Ambient
temperature
:A video source (such as a video game, DVD, or video information
Clean the anti-reflex coated flat glass screen with a slightly damp soft cloth. Do not
use abrasives solvents as it can damage the glass surface of the screen.
Care of the screen
Plasma Display Caution
.
Off
channel) which shows a constant non-moving pattern on the monitor screen, can
cause damage to the screen.When your Flat-Monitor is continuously used with
such a source, the pattern of the non-moving portion of the game (DVD, etc.)
could leave an image permanently on the screen.When not in use, turn the video
source
characteristics
Regularly alternate the use of such video sources with normal viewing.
When switching over to another picture after having displayed the same still
picture for a long time (many hours), it may happen that some parts from the
previous picture will remain on screen due to a kind of memory effect.This ghost
picture will disappear after some time.To avoid this effect change the pictures
regularly or for PC use you can turn on a screen saver in your computer.
Philips has built in an automatic shift of the picture in video mode every 5 minutes
to avoid this effect and to prolong the life of the screen.
Very incidentally and after a longer period of unuse (approx. 1 year) the screen
may display some strange colour deficiencies.This is quite normal for plasma
displays and these effects will disappear after the set has been turned on for some
time.
A plasma display consists of a high number of colour pixels. It is within industry
standards that very few pixels (< 0.001%) may be defective, even for a new set.
There is however no reason to doubt about the quality of the set.
The plasma display technology operates with rare gases which are being influenced
by air pressure.
Up to an altitude of 2000 m above sea-level (local air pressure equal or above
800 hPa), the display is functioning fine. Operating the set at a higher altitude
(lower air pressure), the picture becomes unstable and the picture performance is
deteriorating.The plasma display might then also produce a humming sound.
Bringing the set below 2000 m (local air pressure equal or above 800 hPa) it works
fine again.Transportation has no influence.
position of other equipment. E.g.keep away a wireless headphone from within a
radius of 1,5 m.
The infrared radiation of the screen may influence the reception sensitivity of
other peripherals. Solution:replace the batteries of the remote control or change
Control of
peripheral
equipment
equipment or neon lights, etc.?
Sometimes you can improve the picture quality by changing the direction of the
Keep the original packaging to transport the monitor if needed.
Transport
Poor Picture • Have you selected the correct TV system in the manual installation menu?
aerial.
• Is your TV or house aerial located too close to loudspeakers, non-earthed audio
• Mountains or high buildings can cause double pictures or ghost images.
• Is the picture or teletext unrecognisable? Check if you have entered the correct
frequency. See Installation, Manual installation, p. 6.
the Setup, General menu, p. 8.
• Are brightness, sharpness and contrast out of adjustment? Select Factory settings in
22
Page 16
EN 16 FTP1.1E3.
l
h
i
h
h
d
h
l
(
)
3
C
S
/C
f
e
sa
e
t
e
h
i
f
f
(
)
ß
A
C
S
/C
S
G
gl
h
k
i
f
i
/
(
)
3
C
S
/C
d
l
d
(
)
3
S
C
S
/C
f
31
22
8
2
Directions for Use
Personal Notes:
era
to
one device at
connector o
and Y
aptor to connect temporary perip
VB
a
.
camcorder, digital camera, game boy,...
im
XTERNAL
quipment
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO R
AUDIO L
m
ote: do not connect the
h
eutsc
erter Adapter e
tgel
e scart to cinc
ed adaptor
is
se t
ng
uppl
an
Scart Adapter wird gebraucht, um periphere
en.
Camcorder, Digital Kamera,Telespiel...
nzuschlie
er Cinch au
eräte
erätes
tecker eines
und Y
VB
en.
zeitig einstec
eic
nmerkung: Niemals den
cinch pour connecter
ourn
adaptateur péritel
s
tiliser l
ança
daptateur
sur
sur un appareil en
camescopes,
et Y
VB
me temps.
pareils photos numériques, consoles de jeu...
XTERNAL
emarque: ne pas raccorder de câble
emporairement des appareils périphériques
s
an er
e
gevoegde adapter
aan te
camcorder, digitale camera, game boy,...
paratuur
ebruik de scart naar cinch adapter om tijdelijke rand-
de
connector van één en hetzel
en Y
VB
luit de
XTERNAL
pmerking:
uiten op
. 7
5
Page 17

4. Mechanical Instructions

8x
8x
e
1
Mechanical Instructions
EN 17FTP1.1E 4.
Index of this chapter:
1. Service Positions
2. Assy / PWB Removal
3. Re-assembly
Notes:
Figures below can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to the different set executions.
Follow the disassemble instructions in described order.

4.1 Service Positions

4.1.1 The Foam Bars

CL 36532051_002.eps
190603
heating, and/or falling. The stands can be mounted and removed quickly and easily with use of the provided screws, which can be tightened and loosened manually without the use of tools. The stands are also handy to replace the screen. Caution: Only use the screws provided, otherwise it is possible to damage the monitor inside.

4.2 Assy/PWB Removal

4.2.1 Metal Back Plate

Warning: Disconnect the mains power cord before you remove the rear cover.
8x
4
6
Figure 4-3 Rear cover removal
8x
1
5
2
3
4
CL 36532075_051.eps
181103
Figure 4-1 Foam bars
To put the TV set in its service position place it upside down on a table top, use foam cushions or a protection sheet. The foam bars (order code 3122 785 90580 for two pieces) can be used for all types and sizes of Flat TVs. By laying the plasma or LCD TV flat on the (ESD protective) foam bars, a stable situation is created to perform measurements and alignments. By first placing a mirror flat on the table under the TV you can easily see if something is happening on the screen. Caution: When using a sheet, the plasma screen can become very hot. Therefore, it is advised to use foam cushions

4.1.2 The Aluminium Stands

Notes:
It is not needed to remove the T8 screws (1) around and above the “stand holes”.
It is also not needed to remove the T8 screws (2) around the SSB outer box.
1. Remove all T10 metric screws (3) from the centre part of the metal back plate.
2. Remove all T10 parker screws (4), some of them are indicated on the figure above.
3. Remove two T20 screws (5).
4. Lift the metal back plate from the cabinet. Make sure that
wires and flat foils are not damaged during cover removal.

4.2.2 Small Signal Board

Small Signal Board (SSB) Box disassembly
7
8
1
CL 36532051_001.eps
040703
Figure 4-2 Aluminium stands
The aluminium stands (order code 3122 785 90480 for two pieces) can also be used to do measurements and alignments, also they are very suitable to perform duration tests. With this stands the set does not take much space, has no risk of over
9
Figure 4-4 SSB Box. Top view
CL 36532075_053.
181
Page 18
EN 18 FTP1.1E4.
s 3
Mechanical Instructions

4.2.3 Audio Amplifier Panel

54
6
3
3
2
CL 36532075_052.eps
181103
Figure 4-5 SSB Box. Front view
1. Release the AC input cables from the Plasma Panel and SSB.
2. Remove the two mounting screws (1) at the both sides of the SSB Box.
3. Remove all mounting screws (2) at the front side of the SSB Box.
4. Remove all metric screws (3) at the front side of the SSB Box.
5. Remove all parker screws (4) at the front side of the SSB Box.
6. Use a hex nut driver or pliers to remove both connector fixing screws (5) by the VGA connector.
7. Remove the two silver coloured metric mounting screws (6) by the mains cord.
8. Carefully turn upside-down the SSB Box. Remove the two mounting screws at the bottom side of the SSB box.
9. Turn the SSB Box back to the initial position. Release plastic clamps (7) at the topside of the SSB Box (see figure: “SSB Box. Top view”). Carefully use a flat screwdriver to release the metal clamps at the both sides of the SSB Box. Lift the shielding cover of the SSB Box.
SSB removal
TWEETER LOUD SPEAKERS
AUDIO AMPLFIER PANEL
EMC PANEL
MAIN SWITCH PANEL
CL 36532075_055.eps
Figure 4-7 Speaker and panel removal
1. Disconnect all cables from the panel.
2. Remove the fixing screws from the panel.
3. Remove the panel.

4.2.4 EMC Interface Panel and Main Switch Panel

See figure “Speakers and panels removal”.
Note: Before removing the EMC Interface Panel and Main Switch Panel you have to remove the plastic rear cover.
1. Remove all T10 parker screws (6) around edges of the plastic rear cover, some of them are indicated on figure “Rear cover removal”.
2. Disconnect all cables from the panels.
3. Remove the fixing screws from the panels.
4. Remove the panels.
181103
1
2
CL 36532075_054.ep
Figure 4-6 SSB removal
1. Release all cable from the SSB.
2. Remove all mounting screws from the SSB (1).
3. Remove the SSB.

4.2.5 Plasma Panel

Make sure, that the power is switched “off” and that the necessary cables are disconnected. Note: Before replacing the Plasma Panel, first remove SSB Box, Audio Amplifier Panel and EMC Interface Panel, as described above.
1. Remove the four PDP brackets, two of them are indicated (9) on the figure “SSB Box. Top view”.
18110
2. Remove all fixing screws from the Shielding Frame. Lift and remove the Shielding Frame.
3. Remove all fixing screws from the Plasma Panel. Lift and remove the Plasma Panel.

4.3 Set Re-assembly

To re-assemble the whole set, execute all processes in reverse order.
Note: While re-assembling, make sure, that all cables are placed and connected in their original position
Page 19
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding

5. Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding

EN 19FTP1.1E 5.
Index of this chapter:
1. Test points
2. Service Modes
3. Problems and solving tips (related to CSM)
4. ComPair
5. Error Codes
6. The blinking LED procedure
7. Protections
8. Repair tips
9. Software downloading

5.1 Test Points

The chassis is equipped with test points printed on the circuit board assemblies.
Perform measurements under the following conditions:
Service Default Mode.
Video: colour bar signal.
Audio: 3 kHz left, 1 kHz right.

5.2 Service Modes

Service Default Mode (SDM) and Service Alignment Mode (SAM) offer several features for the service technician, while the Customer Service Mode (CSM) is used for communication between a Philips Customer Care Centre (P3C) and a customer.
There is also the option of using ComPair, a hardware interface between a computer (see requirements below) and the TV chassis. It offers the ability of structured troubleshooting, test pattern generation, error code reading, software version readout, and software upgrading. Minimum requirements: a Pentium processor, Windows 95/ 98, and a CD-ROM drive (see also paragraph “ComPair”).

5.2.1 Service Default Mode (SDM)

Purpose
To create a pre-defined setting, to get the same measurement results as given in this manual.
To override SW protections.
To start the blinking LED procedure.
Specifications
Tuning frequency: 475.25 MHz for PAL/SECAM.
Colour system: SECAM L for France or PAL B/G for the
rest of Europe.
All picture settings at 50 % (brightness, colour, contrast).
All sound settings at 50 %, except volume at 25 %.
All service-unfriendly modes (if present) are disabled, like: (Sleep) timer.Child/parental lock.Blue mute.Automatic volume limiter (AVL).Auto switch-off (when no video signal was received for
10 minutes).
Skip/blank of non-favourite pre-sets.Smart modes.Auto store of personal presets.Auto user menu time-out.
How to enter SDM
Use one of the following methods:
Use the standard RC-transmitter and key in the code “062596”, directly followed by the “MENU” button.
Note: It is possible that, together with the SDM, the main menu will appear. To switch it off, push the “MENU” button again.
Short for a moment the two solder pads (item 9018) on the SSP, with the indication “SDM”. Activation can be performed in all modes, except when the set has a problem with the main microprocessor. Caution: If the SDM is entered via the pins, all the software-controlled protections are de-activated.
Use the DST-emulation feature of ComPair.
Use the “DEFAULT” button on the Dealer Service Tool
(RC7150, this remote is no longer available).
After entering this mode, “SDM” will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
How to navigate
When you press the “MENU” button on the RC transmitter, the set will toggle between the SDM and the normal user menu (with the SDM mode still active in the background).
How to exit SDM
Use one of the following methods:
Switch the set to STANDBY via the RC-transmitter.
Press the “EXIT” button on the DST.
Via a standard customer RC-transmitter: key in “00”-
sequence.

5.2.2 Service Alignment Mode (SAM)

Purpose
To perform (software) alignments.
To change option settings.
To easily identify the used software version.
To view operation hours.
To display (or clear) the error code buffer.
Specifications
Operation hours counter.
Software version.
Option settings.
Error buffer reading and erasing.
Software alignments.
How to enter SAM
Use one of the following methods:
Via a standard RC transmitter: key in the code “062596” directly followed by the “OSD [i+]” button. After entering SAM with this method a service warning will appear on the screen, you can continue by pressing any digit key on the RC.
Short for a moment the two solder pads (item 9017) on the SSP with the indication "SAM". Depending on the software version, it is possible that a service warning will appear. You can continue by pressing any digit key on the RC.
Use the DST-emulation feature of ComPair.
Press the ALIGN button on the DST while the set is in the
normal operation
After entering this mode, “SAM” will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
Contents of SAM:
OPERATION HOURS. Displays the accumulated total of operation hours (not the standby hours).
HARDWARE INFO.ROM VERSION. Displays the date of the software and
the software version of the ROM (example: TP11EU_1.0_01234 = AAAABB_X.Y_NNNNN).
AAAA= the chassis name.
Page 20
EN 20 FTP1.1E5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
BB= the region: EU= Europe, AP= Asia Pacific
PAL/Multi, AN= Asia Pacific NTSC, US= USA, LT= LATAM.
X.Y= the software version, where X is the main
version number (different numbers are not compatible with one another) and Y is the sub version number (a higher number is always compatible with a lower number).
NNNNN= last five digits of 12nc code software.
SW VERSION EPLD. Displays the software version of
the EPLD.
ERRORS. (followed by maximal 10 errors). The most
recent error is displayed at the upper left (for an error explanation see paragraph “Error Codes”).
DEFECTIVE MODULE. Here the module that generates
the error is displayed. If there are multiple errors in the buffer, which are not all generated by a single module, there is probably another defect. It will then display the message “UNKNOWN” here.
RESET ERROR BUFFER. When you press the “OK”
button, the error buffer is reset.
ALIGNMENTS. This will activate the “ALIGNMENTS” sub-
menu.
DEALER OPTIONS. Extra features for the dealers.
SERVICE OPTIONS. Extra features for Service.
INITIALISE NVM. When an NVM was corrupted (or
replaced) in the former EM3 chassis, the microprocessor replaces the content with default data (to assure that the set can operate). However, all pre-sets and alignment values are gone now, and option numbers are not correct. Therefore, this was a very drastic way. In this chassis, the procedure is implemented in another way: The moment the processor recognises a corrupted NVM, the “initialise NVM” line will be highlighted. Now, you can do two things (dependent of the service instructions at that moment): – Save the content of the NVM via ComPair for
development analysis, before initialising. This will give the Philips Service department an extra possibility for diagnosis (e.g. when Development asks for this).
– Initialise the NVM (same as in the past, however now it
happens conscious).
STORE. All options and alignments are stored when
pressing the “OK”-button
FUNCTIONAL TEST. All devices are tested via the “OK”
button. Eventual errors are displayed in the error buffer. The error buffer is not erased, the content returns when this test is terminated.
DAILY MENUS. With the “OK” button, you can go to the
normal user menu. SAM is still active in the background. With the “MENU” button, you return from the user menu to SAM menu. This feature can be helpful to quickly change some settings in the user menu.
SW MAINTENANCE.
UPGRADE. More info see paragraph Software
downloading.
EVENTS. Not useful for service purposes. In case of
specific software problems, the development department can ask for this info.
BDM INFO. Broadcast Debug Menu info. The purpose of this menu is to debug the broadcast, not the TV. The menu gives an overview of what is received on the current preset.
Following items are displayed:
P r e s e t n r : -- UTC: - - : - - : -- P r e s e t n a m e : ----- LTO: - - : - - : -- Time: - - : - - : -- C N I N V M : ---- Date: - - / - - / ---- C N I F 1 : ---- C N I F 2 : ---- Time TXT: - - : - - : -- C N I V P S : ---- Time 8/30 F1: - - : - - : -- M o r n i n g P r o g : --- Date 8/30 F1: - - / - - / ---- N a m e 8 / 3 0 F 1 : ----- LTO 8/30 F1: - - : - - : -- N a m e 8 / 3 0 F 2 : ----- N a m e T X T : ----- WSS G1: - - - - S i g n a l S t r e n g t h :--- WSS G2: - - - - WSS G3: - - - E P G S e r v i c e : --- WSS G4: - - -
CL 36532017_055.eps
240403
Figure 5-1 Broadcast debug menu overview.
Table 5-1 Broadcast debug menu explanation
Item Source Description
Presetnr Set Presetnumber of the current
selected preset.
Presetname Set Presetname of the current se-
lected preset.
CNI NVM Broadcaster CNI number stored in NVM for
the current preset.
CNI F1 Broadcaster CNI number from transmitted
Packet 8/30 Format 1.
CNI F2 Broadcaster CNI number from transmitted
Packet 8/30 Format 2.
CNI VPS Broadcaster CNI number from transmitted
VPS line.
Morning Prog Broadcaster "ARD" or "ZDF" according to
dedicated bit in 8/30 Format 1.
Name 8/30 F1 Broadcaster Name extracted from status
message of 8/30 Format 1.
Name 8/30 F2 Broadcaster Name extracted from status
message of 8/30 Format 2.
Name TXT Broadcaster Name extracted from TXT
header.
Signal Strength
FBX Noise figure measured for se-
lected preset.
EPG Service Set EPG Service stored in NVM for
current preset displayed as "TXT", "MCP", "SCP", "OCP".
UTC Set UTC (Universal Time Code for-
merly known as Greenwich Mean Time) used in the set.
LTO Set LTO (Local Time Offset) used
in the set. Used by EPG for all Nextview displays. (= Time TXT header - Time 8/30 F1 )
Time Set Current time running in the set.
Was extracted at startup, then maintained by software.
Date Set Current date running in the set.
Was extracted at startup, then maintained by software.
Time TXT Broadcaster TXT header time from the se-
lected preset. Time 8/30 F1 Broadcaster UTC time from 8/30 Format 1. Date 8/30 F1 Broadcaster Date from 8/30 Format 1. LTO 8/30 F1 Broadcaster LTO from 8/30 Format 1. WSS G1 Broadcaster WSS Group 1 (Aspect Ratio)
bits 0 1 2 3 WSS G2 Broadcaster WSS Group 2 (Enhanced
Services) bits 4 5 6 7 WSS G3 Broadcaster WSS Group 3 (Subtitles) bits 8
9 10 WSS G4 Broadcaster WSS Group 4 (Reserved) bits
11 12 13
Page 21
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
EN 21FTP1.1E 5.
How to navigate
In SAM, you can select the menu items with the “CURSOR UP/DOWN” key on the RC-transmitter. The selected item will be highlighted. When not all menu items fit on the screen, move the “CURSOR UP/DOWN” key to display the next/previous menu items.
With the “CURSOR LEFT/RIGHT” keys, it is possible to:(De) activate the selected menu item.Change the value of the selected menu item.Activate the selected submenu.
How to exit SAM
Use one of the following methods:
Press the “MENU” button on the RC-transmitter, or
Switch the set to STANDBY via the RC-transmitter, or
Press the “EXIT” button on the DST.

5.2.3 Customer Service Mode (CSM)

Purpose
When a customer is having problems with his TV-set, he can call his dealer. The service technician can than ask the customer to activate the CSM, in order to identify the status of the set. Now, the service technician can judge the severity of the complaint. In many cases, he can advise the customer how to solve the problem, or he can decide if it is necessary to visit the customer. The CSM is a read only mode; therefore, modifications in this mode are not possible.
How to enter CSM
Use one of the following methods:
Press the “MUTE” button on the RC-transmitter simultaneously with the “MENU” button on the TV (top control) for at least 4 seconds.
Key in the code “123654” via the standard RC transmitter.
Note: Activation of the CSM is only possible if there is no (user) menu on the screen!
How to navigate
By means of the “CURSOR-DOWN/UP” knob on the RC­transmitter, you can navigate through the menus.
Contents of CSM
CUSTOMER SERVICE MENU 1
SOFTWARE VERSION (example: TP11EU_1.0_01234).
Displays the built-in software version. In case of field problems related to software, software can be upgraded (for more details, see paragraph Software downloading). You will find details of the software versions in the chapter “Software Survey” of the “Product Survey - Colour Television” publication. This publication is generated four times a year.
SOFTWARE VERSION EPLD. The 12NC-number of the built-in EPLD software.
FEATURE BOX. The 12NC-number of the built-in Feature Box software.
SET TYPE. This information is very helpful for a helpdesk/ workshop as reference for further diagnosis. In this way, it is not necessary for the customer to look at the rear of the TV-set.
CODE 1. Gives the latest five errors of the error buffer. As soon as the built-in diagnose software has detected an error the buffer is adapted. The last occurred error is displayed on the leftmost position. Each error code is displayed as a 3-digit number. When less than 10 errors occur, the rest of the buffer is empty (000). See also paragraph Error Codes for a description.
CODE 2. Gives the first five errors of the error buffer. See also paragraph Error Codes for a description.
VOLUME. Gives the last status of the volume as set by the
customer. The value can vary from 0 (volume is minimum) to 100 (volume is maximum). Volume values can be changed via the volume key on the RC-transmitter.
BRIGHTNESS. Gives the last status of the brightness as
set by the customer. The value can vary from 0 (brightness is minimum) to 100 (brightness is maximum). Brightness values can be changed via the “CURSOR LEFT” and “CURSOR RIGHT” keys on the RC-transmitter after pressing the “MENU” button and selecting “PICTURE” and “BRIGHTNESS”.
CONTRAST. Gives the last status of the contrast as set by
the customer. The value can vary from 0 (contrast is minimum) to 100 (contrast is maximum). Contrast values can be changed via “CURSOR LEFT” and “CURSOR RIGHT” keys on the RC-transmitter after pressing the “MENU” button and selecting “PICTURE” and “CONTRAST”.
CUSTOMER SERVICE MENU 2
COLOUR. Gives the last status of the colour saturation, as
set by the customer. The value can vary from 0 (colour is minimum) to 100 (colour is maximum). Colour values can be changed via “CURSOR LEFT” and “CURSOR RIGHT” keys on the RC-transmitter after pressing the “MENU” button and selecting “PICTURE” and “COLOUR”.
HUE. Only relevant for NTSC-signals (e.g. some NTSC-
DVD-discs).
SHARPNESS. Gives the sharpness value. The value can
vary from 0 (sharpness is minimum) to 7 (sharpness is maximum). In case of bad antenna signals, a too high value of the sharpness can result in a noisy picture. Sharpness values can be changed via the “CURSOR LEFT” and “CURSOR RIGHT” keys on the RC-transmitter after pressing the “MENU” button and selecting “PICTURE” and “SHARPNESS”.
HEADPHONE VOLUME. Gives the last status of the
headphone volume, as set by the customer. The value can vary from 0 (volume is minimum) to 100 (volume is maximum). Headphone volume values can be changed via the “CURSOR LEFT” and “CURSOR RIGHT” keys on the RC-transmitter after pressing the “MENU” button and selecting “SOUND” and “HEADPHONE VOLUME”.
SURROUND MODE. Indicates the by the customer
selected surround mode (or automatically chosen mode). Possible values are “OFF”, “INCREDIBLE SURROUND” OR “DOLBY VIRTUAL”. These settings can be influenced after pressing the “MENU” button and selecting “SOUND” and SURROUND MODE”. It can also have been selected automatically by signalling bits (internal software).
TUNER FREQUENCY. Indicates the frequency the
selected transmitter is tuned to. The tuner frequency can be changed via the “CURSOR LEFT” and “CURSOR RIGHT” keys for fine tune after opening the installation menu and selecting “INSTALL” and “MANUAL INSTALL”.
DIGITAL OPTION. Gives the selected digital mode,
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN”, “MOVIE PLUS” or “PIXEL PLUS”. Change via “MENU”, “PICTURE”, “DIGITAL OPTIONS”.
TV SYSTEM. Gives information about the video system of
the selected transmitter.
BG: PAL BG signal received.DK: PAL DK signal received.I: PAL I signal received.L/La: SECAM L/La signals received.M: NTSC M signal received with video carrier on 38.9
MHz.
BALANCE. Indicates the balance settings, between “-50”
and “+50”. Change via “MENU”, “SOUND”, and “BALANCE”. Not applicable for Dolby Pro Logic sets.
CUSTOMER SERVICE MENU 3
CENTRE MODE. Indicates if centre mode is set “ON” or
“OFF”. When centre mode is on, all TV speakers are used
Page 22
EN 22 FTP1.1E5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
as one centre speaker. Change Centre mode via “MENU”, “SETUP”, “SPEAKERS”, and “CENTRE MODE”.
DNR. Gives the selected DNR setting (Dynamic Noise
Reduction), “OFF”, “MINIMUM”, “MEDIUM”, or “MAXIMUM”. Change via “MENU”, “PICTURE”, “DNR”
NOISE FIGURE. Gives the noise ratio for the selected
transmitter. This value can vary from 0 (good signal) to 127 (average signal) and to 255 (bad signal). For some software versions, the noise figure will only be valid when “Active Control” is set to “medium” or “maximum”.
SOURCE. Indicates which source is used and the video/
audio signal quality of the selected source. (Example: Tuner, Video/NICAM) Source: “TUNER”, “EXT1”, “EXT2”, “EXT3”, “EXT4”, “SIDE”, “AV1”, “AV2”, “AV3” or “AV4”. Video signal quality: “VIDEO”, “S-VIDEO”, “RGB 1FH”, “YPBPR 1FH 480P”, “YPBPR 1FH 576P”, “YPBPR 1FH 1080I”, “YPBPR 2FH 480P”, “YPBPR 2FH 576P”, “YPBPR 2FH 1080I”, “RGB 2FH 480P”, “RGB 2FH 576P” or “RGB 2FH 1080I”. Audio signal quality: “STEREO”, “SPDIF 1”, “SPDIF 2”, or “SPDIF”.
AUDIO SYSTEM. Gives information about the audio
system of the selected transmitter: “ANALOGUE MONO”, “ANALOGUE STEREO”, “PCM 2/0”, “DD 1/0”, “DD 2/0 LtRt”, “DD 2/0 L0R0”, “DD 2/1”, “DD 2/2”, “DD 3/0”, “DD 3/ 1”, “DD 3/2”, “DD 1+1”, “MPEG 1/0”, “MPEG 2/0”, “MPEG 2/0 LtRt”, “MPEG 2/1”, “MPEG 2/2”, “MPEG 3/0”, “MPEG 3/1”, “MPEG 3/2”, “MPEG 1+1” or “MPEG 2+2”.
TUNED BIT. Gives information about the tuning method of
the stored pre-set. If a channel is found via “automatic installation”, you will see the value “YES”. When you change this (automatically found) frequency via “fine tune” adjustment (installation menu - manual installation), the displayed value will change to “NO”. Therefore, when you see the value “NO” in this line, it is an indication that the received channel is a non-standard signal (e.g. of a VCR).
SURROUND SPEAKERS. Not applicable in this set.
ON TIMER. Indicates if the “On Timer” is set “ON” or “OFF”
and if the timer is “ON” also displays start time, start day and program number. Change via “MENU”, “TV”, “FEATURES”, and “ON TIMER”.
PRESET LOCK. Indicates if the selected preset has a child
lock: “LOCKED” or “UNLOCKED”. Change via “MENU”, “TV”, “FEATURES”, “CHILD LOCK”, and “CUSTOM LOCK”.
CHILD LOCK. Indicates the last status of the general child
lock: “UNLOCK”, “LOCK”, or “CUSTOM LOCK”. Change via “MENU”, “TV”, “FEATURES”, “CHILD LOCK”, and “LOCK”.
CUSTOMER SERVICE MENU 4
AGE LOCK. Indicates the last status of the EPG rating for
child lock: “OFF”, “4 YEARS”, “6 YEARS”, “8 YEARS”, “10 YEARS”, “12 YEARS”, “14 YEARS” or “16 YEARS”. This is only displayed if child lock is set to “CUSTOM LOCK”
LOCK AFTER. Indicates at what time the child lock is set:
“OFF” or e.g. “18:45” (lock time). This is only displayed if child lock is set to “CUSTOM LOCK”
CATEGORY LOCK. Indicates the last status of the EPG
theme childlock: “MOVIES”, “NEWS”, “SHOWS”, “SPORTS”, “CHILDREN”, “MUSIC”, “CULTURE”, or “SERIES”. This is only displayed if child lock is set to “CUSTOM LOCK”. It is possible that more than one value is shown.
PROGRAM CATEGORY. Indicates the theme of the
selected transmitter: “MOVIES”, “NEWS”, “SHOWS”, “SPORTS”, “CHILDREN”, “MUSIC”, “CULTURE”, or “SERIES”.
TV RATINGS LOCK. Only applicable for US.
MOVIE RATINGS LOCK. Only applicable for US.
V-CHIP TV STATUS. Only applicable for US.
V-CHIP MOVIE STATUS. Only applicable for US.
OPTIONS 1. Gives the option codes of option group 1 as
set in SAM (Service Alignment Mode).
OPTIONS 2. Gives the option codes of option group 2 as
set in SAM (Service Alignment Mode).
CUSTOMER SERVICE MENU 5
AVL. Indicates the last status of AVL (Automatic Volume
Level): “ON” or “OFF”. Change via “MENU”, “TV”, “SOUND”, “AVL”
DELTA VOLUME. Indicates the last status of the delta
volume for the selected preset as set by the customer: from “-12” to “+12”. Change via “MENU”, “TV”, “SOUND”, “DELTA VOLUME”.
How to exit CSM
Use one of the following methods:
After you press a key on the RC-transmitter (with exception of the “CHANNEL”, “VOLUME” and digit (0-9) keys), or
After you switch the TV-set “OFF” with the mains switch.

5.3 Problems and Solving Tips (related to CSM)

Note: Below described problems are all related to the TV
settings (visible in the CSM menu). The procedures to change the value (or status) of the different settings are described above. New value(s) are automatically stored.

5.3.1 Picture Problems

Snowy/noisy picture
1. Check in CSM line NOISE FIGURE. In case the value is "127" or higher, and the value is also high on other programs, check the aerial cable/aerial system. For some software versions, the noise figure will only be valid when “Active Control” is set to “medium” or “maximum”.
2. Check in CSM lines SHARPNESS and NOISE FIGURE. In case the value of line SHARPNESS is "3" or "4" and the value of line NOISE FIGURE is high ("127" or higher), decrease the "Sharpness” value.
Picture too dark
1. Press “Menu”, “TV”, “Picture”, “Smart Picture”. In case the picture improves, increase the “Brightness” or the “Contrast” value. The new value(s) are automatically stored (in “personal” pre-set) for all TV channels.
2. Check in CSM line BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST. If the value of these lines is low (< "10"), increase the “Brightness” or the “Contrast” value via the user menu.
Picture too bright
1. Press “Menu”, “TV”, “Picture”, “Smart Picture”. In case the picture improves, decrease the “Brightness” or the “Contrast” value. The new value(s) are automatically stored (in “personal” pre-set) for all TV channels.
2. Check in CSM lines BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST. If the value of these line is high (> 50), decrease the “Brightness” value or increase the “Contrast” value via the user menu.
White line around picture elements and text
1. Press “Menu”, “TV”, “Picture”, “Smart Picture”. In case the picture improves, decrease the “Sharpness” value. The new value is automatically stored (in “personal” pre-set) for all TV channels.
2. Check in CSM line “Sharpness”. If the value is high, decrease it. The new value is automatically stored for all TV channels.
No picture
Check in CSM line TUNED BIT. In case the value is “No”, install the required program again. Open the installation menu and perform manual installation.
No picture
No proper signal is received. Check the aerial cable/aerial system.
Page 23
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
EN 23FTP1.1E 5.
No picture or unstable picture
A scrambled or decoded signal is received.
Black and white picture
Check in CSM line COLOUR. In case the value is low (< "10"), increase the “Colour” value via the user menu. The new value is automatically stored for all TV channels.
No colours/colour lines around picture elements or colours not correct or unstable picture
1. Check in CSM line TV SYSTEM. If a “strange” system pops up, something has gone wrong during installation. Re­install the channel.
2. If in CSM line TV SYSTEM is “L”, the installed system for this pre-set is “France”, while “West Europe” is required. Install the required program again: open the installation menu and perform manual installation. Select system “West Europe”.
Menu text not sharp enough
1. Press “MENU”, “TV”, “PICTURE”, “SMART PICTURE”. In case picture improves, decrease the contrast value. The new value(s) are automatically stored for all TV channels.
2. Check line “Contrast”. The value is high (> 50). Decrease the contrast value.

5.3.2 Sound Problems

No sound from left and right speaker
Check line “Volume”. The value is low. Increase the value of “Volume”. The new value(s) are automatically stored (in “personal” pre-set) for all TV channels.
Sound too loud for left and right speaker
Check line “Volume”. The value is high. Decrease the value of “Volume”. The new value(s) are automatically stored (in “personal” pre-set) for all TV channels.

5.4 ComPair

The ComPair faultfinding program is able to determine the problem of the defective television. ComPair can gather diagnostic information in two ways:
Automatic (by communication with the television): ComPair can automatically read out the contents of the entire error buffer. Diagnosis is done on I2C level. ComPair can access the I2C bus of the television. ComPair can send and receive I2C commands to the micro controller of the television. In this way, it is possible for ComPair to communicate (read and write) to devices on the I2C busses of the TV-set.
Manually (by asking questions to you): Automatic diagnosis is only possible if the micro controller of the television is working correctly and only to a certain extends. When this is not the case, ComPair will guide you through the faultfinding tree by asking you questions (e.g. Does the
screen give a picture? Click on the correct answer: YES / NO) and showing you examples (e.g. Measure test-point I7 and click on the correct oscillogram you see on the oscilloscope). You can answer by clicking on a link (e.g.
text or a waveform picture) that will bring you to the next step in the faultfinding process.
By a combination of automatic diagnostics and an interactive question / answer procedure, ComPair will enable you to find most problems in a fast and effective way.
Beside fault finding, ComPair provides some additional features like:
Up- or downloading of pre-sets.
Managing of pre-set lists.
Emulation of the Dealer Service Tool (DST).
If both ComPair and SearchMan (Electronic Service
Manual) are installed, all the schematics and the PWBs of the set are available by clicking on the appropriate hyperlink. Example: Measure the DC-voltage on capacitor C2568 (Schematic/Panel) at the Mono-carrier. – Click on the “Panel” hyperlink to automatically show
the PWB with a highlighted capacitor C2568.
– Click on the “Schematic” hyperlink to automatically
show the position of the highlighted capacitor.

5.4.1 Introduction

ComPair (Computer Aided Repair) is a service tool for Philips Consumer Electronics products. ComPair is a further development on the European DST (service remote control), which allows faster and more accurate diagnostics. ComPair has three big advantages:
ComPair helps you to quickly get an understanding on how to repair the chassis in a short time by guiding you systematically through the repair procedures.
ComPair allows very detailed diagnostics (on I2C level) and is therefore capable of accurately indicating problem areas. You do not have to know anything about I2C commands yourself because ComPair takes care of this.
ComPair speeds up the repair time since it can automatically communicate with the chassis (when the microprocessor is working) and all repair information is directly available. When ComPair is installed together with the SearchMan electronic manual of the defective chassis, schematics and PWBs are only a mouse click away.

5.4.2 Specifications

ComPair consists of a Windows based faultfinding program and an interface box between PC and the (defective) product. The ComPair interface box is connected to the PC via a serial or RS232 cable. For this chassis, the ComPair interface box and the TV communicate via a bi-directional service cable via the service connector.

5.4.3 Stepwise Start-up

Under normal circumstances, a fault in the power supply, or an error during start-up, will switch the television to protection mode. ComPair can take over the initialisation of the television. In this way, it is possible to distinguish which part of the start­up routine (hence which circuitry) is causing the problem. Take notice that the transition between two steps can take some time, so give the set some time to reach a stable state. During the transition time, the LED can blink strangely.
Stepwise start- up explanation
This is realised via ComPair and is very helpful when a protection is activated (see also chapter “Protections”). The following diagram shows the start-up procedure of the set. Every step of the stepwise start-up (also called trapped start­up) in the diagram corresponds with the number of times the led blinks.
Page 24
EN 24 FTP1.1E5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
ON/OFF switch to ON
start time extraction
stand-by bit = off
Step 1
OFF
OTC gets supply voltage
OTC resets, Initialise IO
pins
Read NVM identification
enable watchdog
Stand-by
Activate MSP reset
Put Stand-by line LOW
Keep sound amplifiers muted with
sound enable = high
+5V and +8V is switched on
t<500ms
t<250ms
+8V and +5V get their nominal
level, detected by the OTC
Activate protection algorithms for +8V and +5V
and I²C (start I²C protection the moment the
component is initialised).
Step 2
Read rest of NVM information
Initialize HIP: IF, source selection, 2fh input, video processing
Switch on the syncoutput: set_syncout_tristate= off
Initialize tuner
Initialize 3D Combfilter (US
Deactivate reset MSP and
Step 3
only)
Initialize PICNIC
Start time extraction
Initialize MSP
Initialize EPLD
Stand-by bit set ?
no
t<1500ms
t>400ms
Switch On PDP
yes
Semi stand-by
Initialize PDP
Figure 5-2 Stepwise start-up diagram.
ON
or
Step 5
CL 36532053_064.eps
221003
Page 25
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
EN 25FTP1.1E 5.
Note (*):
When the set is in stepwise mode and, due to stepping-up, a protection is activated, the set will really go into protection (blinking LED). The set will not leave the stepwise-mode however. If state X is the state where the set went to protection, stepwise start-up will return to state X-1. At state (X-1) diagnostic measurements can be performed. Also, in the short time the set is in state X but not yet in protection, you can also do some measurements.

5.4.4 How To Connect

1. First, install the ComPair Browser software (see the Quick Reference Card for installation instructions).
2. Connect the RS232 interface cable between a free serial (COM) port of your PC and the PC connector (marked with “PC”) of the ComPair interface.
3. Connect the mains adapter to the supply connector (marked with “POWER 9V DC”) of the ComPair interface.
4. Switch the ComPair interface “OFF”.
5. Switch the television set “OFF” with the mains switch.
6. Connect the ComPair interface cable between the
connector on the rear side of the ComPair interface (marked with “I2C”) and the ComPair connector at the rear side of the TV.
7. Plug the mains adapter in a mains outlet, and switch the interface “ON”. The green and red LEDs light up together. The red LED extinguishes after approx. 1 second while the green LED remains lit.
8. Start the ComPair program and read the “Introduction” chapter.

5.5 Error Codes

5.5.1 Introduction

The error code buffer contains all detected errors since the last time the buffer was erased. The buffer is written from left to right, new errors are logged at the left side, and all other errors shift one position to the right. When an error has occurred, the error is added to the list of errors, provided the list is not full or the error is a protection error. When an error occurs and the error buffer is full, then the new error is not added, and the error buffer stays intact (history is maintained), except when the error is a protection error. To prevent that an occasional error stays in the list forever, the error is removed from the list after 50+ operation hours. When multiple errors occur (errors occurred within a short time span), there is a high probability that there is some relation between them.

5.5.2 How to read the Error Buffer

Use one of the following methods:
On screen via the SAM (only if you have a picture). Examples:
0 0 0 0 0: No errors detected6 0 0 0 0: Error code 6 is the last and only detected
error
9 6 0 0 0: Error code 6 was first detected and error code
9 is the last detected error
Via the blinking LED procedure (when you have no picture). See next paragraph.
Via ComPair.
EXTERNAL 2
L
R
AUDIO EXTERNAL 1
SERVICE
CONNECTOR
PC VCR I2CPower
9V DC
Figure 5-3 ComPair interface connection

5.4.5 How To Order

ComPair order codes (EU/AP/LATAM):
Starter kit ComPair32/SearchMan32 software and ComPair interface (excl. transformer): 3122 785 90450.
ComPair interface (excluding transformer): 4822 727
21631.
Starter kit ComPair32 software (registration version): 3122 785 60040.
Starter kit SearchMan32 software: 3122 785 60050.
ComPair32 CD (update): 3122 785 60070 (year 2002,
3122 785 60110 (year 2003).
SearchMan32 CD (update): 3122 785 60080 (year 2002), 3122 785 60120 (year 2003).
ComPair interface cable: 3122 785 90004.
ComPair firmware upgrade IC: 3122 785 90510.
Transformer Europe: 4822 727 21632.
Transformer UK: 4822 727 21633.
Note: If you encounter any problems, contact your local support desk.
CL96532156_029.eps
190600

5.5.3 How to clear the Error Buffer

Use one of the following methods:
By activation of the “RESET ERROR BUFFER” command in the SAM menu.
With a normal RC, key in sequence “MUTE” followed by “062599” and “OK”.
When you transmit the commands “DIAGNOSE” - “99” ­“OK” with ComPair (or with a DST).
If the content of the error buffer has not changed for 50+ hours, it resets automatically.

5.5.4 Error Codes

In case of non-intermittent faults, clear the error buffer before you begin the repair. This to ensure that old error codes are no longer present. Before clearing the buffer, write down the content, as this history can give you significant information. If possible, check the entire contents of the error buffer. In some situations, an error code is only the result of another error code and not the actual cause (e.g., a fault in the protection detection circuitry can also lead to a protection). There are various errors:
I2C device errors.
I2C bus errors.
Protection errors.
Errors not related to an I2C device, but of importance:FALCONIC (ERROR 26): at start-up, after initialisation
of the PICNIC, the presence of the FALCONIC can be checked.
EAGLE (ERROR 27): at start-up, after initialisation of
the PICNIC, the presence of the Eagle can be checked.
Page 26
EN 26 FTP1.1E5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
Table 5-2 Error Code Table
Def.
Error Device Description
1M24C32 NVM,
3 SAA4978 PICNIC 7713 Feature Box B3a 4 Supply 5 V 5V protection / +5V Supply B5a 5 Supply 8 V 8V protection / +8V Supply B5a 6 Slow I2C bus
blocked
8 TDA932x HIP High-end Input
13 UV1318/... Tuner protection 1T01 Tuner B13 14 MSPxxxx ITT sound
18 Fast I2C bus
blocked 21 M62320P I/O Expander 7P56 Video Dual Screen B15b 26 SAA4992 Falconic 7718 +3V (FBX) Supply B3b 27 T8F24EF Eagle 7724 +3V (FBX) Supply B3c 32 M29W400BT Flash Ram (EPG) 7012 EPG Memory B5a 53 AD9883A AD converter 2fh
55 3V3_PDP One of the
56 EPLD EPLD error 7V01 Video control B19d,f 76 Audio Amplifier Audio DC
83 TEA6422 Source select
spontaneous blinking error 1
Spontaneous blinking error 6
Processor
processor Spontaneous
blinking error 18
input
voltages is not ok + protection error
protection
matrix audio
Def. Module
item
indication Diagr.
7011 Control B5a
/ Slow I2C Blocked /
7323 Chroma IF IO B2
7A02 Audio module B6a
/ Fast I2C Blocked /
7L01 HD B19c
/ Supply /
-- A
7I17 Audio Source
Select
Note:
Error codes 1, 6, or 18 are protection codes and in this case, supplies of some circuits will be switched “OFF”. Also, in protection, the LED will blink the number of times equivalent to the most recent error code.

5.6 The Blinking LED Procedure

5.6.1 Introduction

Via this procedure, you can make the contents of the error buffer visible via the front LED. This is especially useful for fault finding, when there is no picture.
When the SDM is entered, the front LED will show (blink) the contents of the error-buffer. Error-codes > 10 are shown as follows: – A long blink of 750 ms (which is an indication of the decimal
digit),
A pause of 1.5 s,“n” short blinks (where “n” = 1 - 9),When all the error-codes are displayed, the sequence
finishes with a LED blink of 3 s,
– The sequence starts again.
Example: Error 12 9 6 0 0. After activation of the SDM, the front LED will show: – 1 long blink of 750 ms (which is an indication of the decimal
digit) followed by a pause of 1.5 s,
2 short blinks followed by a pause of 3 s,9 short blinks followed by a pause of 3 s,6 short blinks followed by a pause of 3 s,1 long blink of 3 s to finish the sequence,The sequence starts again.
Note: If errors 1, 6, or 18 occur, the LED always gives the last occurred error even if the set is NOT in service mode.
B14d

5.6.2 How to Enter

Use one of the following methods:
Enter the SDM (only via soldering pads marked “SDM” on SSP). The blinking front LED will show the entire contents of the error buffer (this works in “normal operation” mode and in “protection” mode).
Transmit the commands “MUTE” - “062500” - “OK” with a normal RC. The complete error buffer is shown. Take notice that it takes some seconds before the blinking LED starts.
Transmit the commands “MUTE” - “06250x” - “OK” with a normal RC (where “x” is a number between 1 and 5). When x= 1 the last detected error is shown, x= 2 the second last
error, etc.... Take notice that it takes some seconds before
the blinking LED starts.
“DIAGNOSE X” with the DST (where “x” is a number between 1 and 5). When x= 1 the last detected error is
shown, x= 2 the second last error, etc.... When x = 0 all
errors are shown.

5.7 Protections

5.7.1 Introduction

This chassis has only one microprocessor (OTC), which remains active during Standby. This because power of the microprocessor and the attached memory chip set is coming from the 3V3 supply, which is derived from the 5V Standby­circuitry. Therefore, in both Power-on as in Standby mode, the microprocessor is connected to this power supply.
If a fault situation is detected, an error code will be generated and if necessary, the set is put in protection mode. The protection mode is indicated by the blinking of the front LED at a frequency of 3 Hz (or by a coded blinking in special cases).
The content of the error buffer can be read via the service menu (SAM), the blinking LED procedure or via DST/ComPair.
To get a quick diagnosis, this chassis has three service-modes implemented:
The Customer Service Mode (CSM).
The Service Default Mode (SDM). Start-up of the set in a
predefined way.
The Service Alignment Mode (SAM). In this mode, items of the set can be adjusted via a menu.
You can enter both SDM and SAM modes via the “service pads” on the SSP, via an RC-transmitter (DST or standard RC), or via ComPair. It is not possible to enter the SAM in “standby”; the TV has to be in “normal operation” mode.
The “Protection Diagram” shows the structure of the protection system. See diagram below.
TUNER
FAST I2C BUS BLOCKED
SLOW I2C BUS BLOCKED
EPLD
+
FBX
+
3D COMB (US)
DC_PROT (from audio)
+8V_CON
+5V_CON
DC/DC
PROTECTION
IRQ-DIGITAL (98)
+8V SENSE (105)
+5V SENSE (106)
I2C
OTC
CL 36532053_065.eps
100703
Figure 5-4 Protection diagram.
Page 27
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
EN 27FTP1.1E 5.
There are several types of protections:
I2C related protections.
OTC related protections (via polling on I/O pins or via
algorithms).
Hardware protection All protections are explained below.

5.7.2 I2C Related Protections

In normal operation, some registers of the I2C controlled ICs are refreshed every 200 ms. During this sequence, the I2C busses and the I2C ICs are checked. An I2C protection will take place if the SDA and SCL lines are short-circuited to ground, or to each other. An I2C error will also occur, if the power supply of the IC is missing. 3V3_PDP protection: When the 3V3 supply is short-circuited or interrupted the set switches off and goes into protection. The FBX, EPLD IC and 3D comb (US only) have no supply voltage and give no acknowledge. In this case the set should go into protection. An error code is written in the NVM: 3V3_PDP error. FBX protection: the FBX protection is not available anymore.

5.7.3 OTC Related Protections

If a protection is detected at an OTC input, the OTC will start to scan all protection inputs every 200 ms for 5 times. If the protection on one of the inputs is still active after 1 s, the microprocessor will put the set in the protection mode. Before the scanning is started, a so-called “ESD refresh” is carried out. This is done, because the interrupt on one of the inputs is possibly caused either by a flash or by ESD. As a flash or ESD can influence IC settings, the HIP, MSP, 3D Comb (US only) and wireless module (not used in this set) are initialised again, to ensure the normal picture and sound conditions of the set.
8 V and 5 V protections: The microprocessor senses the presence of the 8 V and 5 V (via the “+5V_CON” and “+8V_CON” lines). If one (or both) of these voltages is (are) not present, an error code is stored in the error buffer of the NVM, and the set is put in the protection mode.
Audio DC protection: The OTC senses if the audio module is in protection via IRQ-DIGITAL (pin 98 of OTC). If this is the case, the OTC puts the set in protection.

5.8.2 ComPair

This chassis does not have an IR transmitting LED (as in MG­sets). Therefore, a “Service” (ComPair) connector is implemented at the rear side of the set, which is directly accessible (as in A10-, EM2E-, EM3E and EM5E-sets). In addition to this, there is also a blinking LED procedure to show the contents of the error buffer.
When you use ComPair, you have the possibility to activate a “stepwise start-up” mode. With this mode, you can initiate the start-up sequence step by step. This also means that in certain steps, some protections are not activated. This is sometimes very convenient during repair.

5.8.3 Protections

Activating SDM via the “service pads” will overrule the processor-controlled protections, but not the hardware protections. This means, that the A/D-input protections (5 and 8 V) and the I2C “not-acknowledging” info of FBX + EPLD + 3D Comb (US) and of the tuner are overruled. Caution: When doing this, the service technician must know what he is doing, as it could lead to damaging the set.

5.8.4 Power Supply

The power supply is part of the PDP display which is not described in this manual. However for normal operation at least +9V-STBY and +9V-STBY-SW must be available, both are available on connector 1Y82 of SSB. When this is valid the standby voltage +5V2-DISP must be available otherwise OTC is not powered.

5.7.4 Hardware Protection

Short-circuiting the 3V3 supply from the PDP will bring the TV in protection mode. The absence of the 3V3 supply line is also sensed via I2C and will be mentioned in the error overview.

5.8 Repair tips

5.8.1 3V3 Supply

As mentioned above, the 3V3 supply is switched “off” when something goes wrong (detection of a missing 3V3 supply at one of the devices supplied by the 3V3). Because of this, the set goes to protection (I2C protection). Error code 55 is logged. For further diagnoses of the SSB, you need to overrule the I2C protection: put the set in Service Default Mode by means of the solder pads on the SSB. Connect an external 3V3 supply at connector 1Y81 (B20) and make sure the current is limited to approximately 1200 mA. If the supplied current exceeds 1100 mA (approximately normal working current) you can conclude that one of the devices supplied by 3V3 is short-circuited on the SSB. If the current does not exceed 1100mA the supply of the PDP is defective.
Page 28
EN 28 FTP1.1E5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
Table 5-3 Repair tips
Phenomenon Possible Cause Repair tip
No picture, LED blinking at 3 Hz. Set is in protection due to various causes.
No picture, LED blinking with code 6-6-6 or 18-18-18.
No picture, LED blinking with code 1-1-1.
No RC-reception. LED does not echo RC-commands.
Picture is not synchronised. The sync is derived in the HIP. Check crystals in the HIP circuit on bad contacts. Picture is distorted. Check video-path in Service Default Mode. Investigate whether there is an error code present in the error buffer. In case there is one, check
Picture with horizontal stripes. Pixel Plus processing is malfunctioning. Check functionality on circuitry (B3a, B3b, and B3c) of PICNIC (7713), FALCONIC (7718, EAGLE
No menu, no OSD. Probably a defective uP. Measure test points B61to B64 on diagram B5A. No NextView (EPG). IC7012 defective or not powered. Check circuitry around IC7012 on diagram B5A. No Teletext. IC7007 defective or not powered. Check circuitry around IC7007 on diagram B5A. Check also B61 to B64 around uP on diagram
Problems caused by EPG (Electronic Program Guide). The TV set "hangs".
NexTView EPG is not functioning only Teletext guide.
Various symptoms, due to missing local supply voltage.
For error codes see error-code list.
No communication on slow I2C- or fast I2C-bus. As processor cannot communicate with one of the 2 busses it the standby-led spontaneously
No communication on NVM-I2C bus to the uP. As the uP cannot communicate with the NVM I2C bus, it spontaneously starts blinking 1-1-1.
uP circuitry or RC-receiver is defective. In case the set does react on a local keyboard operation, you must check the RC-receiver
Problems with NexTView EPG broadcasts. To switch from EPG 2C3 to Teletext guide. Press for 4 seconds, simultaneously the Menu button
EPG version 2C3 is switched off during production. To switch from Teletext guide to EPG 2C3. Press for 4 seconds, simultaneously the Menu button
An interrupted fuse, NFR-resistor or connection. When no symptom or error code leads you to a specific circuitry, use the supply lines overview
You have no picture, so: Read the error buffer via ComPair (error buffer is accessible when set is in protection, compare­file will guide you to this) Read the blinking LED information via standard remote command <mute>06250x<ok>. Or you read the error code sequence via standard remote command <mute>062500<ok>. When you have found the error, check the circuitry related to the supply voltage and I2C­communication or the circuitry that triggers the protection.
starts blinking 6-6-6-etc or 18-18-18-etc... If in the error buffer somewhere is an error 6 or 18, these will have the highest priority starting the mentioned blinking. Measure dependent of the error on the I2C-bus which device is loading the bus. (Use I2C­overview)
Note: when there is no access to the NVM, a lot of picture setting can go wrong.
circuitry (diagram LD).
the I2C-bus and/or supply lines (see overview supply lines). Measure and check signal path Tuner-HIP-FBX-EPLD.
(7724) and/or field memories (7714, 7717, 7719, 7722 and 7723. Tip: the whole Pixel Plus chipset (3 ICs + 5 Field Memories) can be diagnosed via ComPair.
B5A.
on the TV and digit 0 on the remote. The option settings for NexTView type and Flashram will not change.
on the TV and digit 1 on the remote. The option settings for NexTView type and Flashram will not change.
(see supply lines overview), for a quick scan of all supply lines.

5.9 Software Downloading

In this chassis, you can upgrade the software via ComPair without removing the back cover of the set. The switch, which is needed for the software downloading procedure, can be reached through the cooling gaps of the back cover. The switch is located next to the SAM/SDM pads and can be operated with a long and thin screwdriver. Make sure that you do not damage the PWB with sharp objects. You can find more information on how this procedure works in the ComPair file. It is possible that not all sets are equipped with the hardware, needed to make software upgrading possible. To speed up the programming process the firmware of the ComPair interface can be upgraded. See paragraph “How To Order” for the order number
Page 29

8. Electrical Alignments

Electrical Alignments
EN 89FTP1.1E 8.
Index of this chapter:
1. General alignment conditions
2. Hardware alignments
3. Software alignments
4. Option settings

8.1 General Alignment Conditions

8.1.1 Start Conditions

Perform all electrical adjustments under the following conditions:
Power supply voltage: 230 V_ac / 50 Hz (± 10 %).
Connect the set to the mains via an isolation transformer
with low internal resistance.
Allow the set to warm up for approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
Measure voltages and waveforms in relation to chassis ground (with the exception of the voltages on the primary side of the power supply). Caution: never use heatsinks as ground.
Test probe: Ri > 10 Mohm, Ci < 20 pF.
Va Vsc Vs Ve Vset REMARKS
       
VSB +3.3SBSW Vcc D5V 8V6 VFAN
         
Use an isolated trimmer/screwdriver to perform alignments.

8.1.2 Initial Settings

Perform all electrical adjustments with the following initial settings (via the "Active Control" button on the RC):
1. To avoid the working of the lightsensor, set "Active Control" to "Off".
2. Set "Smart Picture" to "Natural".
3. Set "Active Display" to "Off".
4. Set contrast to max (100).

8.2 Hardware Alignments

There are no alignments needed, except in case the PDP has been exchanged or the PDP-supply has been exchanged. In that case both must be matched.
VOLTAGE ADJUST DIRECTION
UP
DOWN
VR8001
VR8002
VSB
PFC
VR8011
+3V3_VSB_SW

Figure 8-1 Supply Alignment

VR8007
8V6
VR8012
DV5
VR8008
VS
VR8010
VA
VR8009
VCC
ALARM BOARD
I2C OVP UVP
VR8006
VFAN
VR8005
VE
VR8004 VSCAN
VR8003
VSET
CL 36532075_058.eps
211103
Procedure:
See figure above.
The six potmeters influencing VSB, +3V3_VSB_SW, VCC,
D5V, 8V6, and VFAN are not critical for matching. In case of doubt values can be checked versus mentioned voltages.
The five potmeters VS, VA, VSET, VE, and VSCAN have to be matched with the values displayed on the PDP-label.
Start with aligning potmeter VR8008 to adjust VS and then respectively VR8010 (VA), VR8003 (VSET), VR8005 (VE), and VR8004 (VSCAN).
To double check, repeat whole sequence again, to check the correct value.

8.3 Software Alignments

Put the set in SAM mode (see the "Service Modes, Error Codes and Fault Finding" section). The SAM menu will now appear on the screen. Select ALIGNMENTS and go to one of the sub menus. The alignments are explained below.
Page 30
EN 90 FTP1.1E8.
Electrical Alignments
Notes:
All changes must be stored manually.
If an empty EAROM (permanent memory) is detected, all
settings are set to pre-programmed default values.

8.3.1 GENERAL

LUMA GAIN
Fixed setting of "2".
IF AFC
Supply, via a service generator or via off-air, a PAL B/G TV­signal with a signal strength of at least 1 mV and a frequency of 475.25 MHz. Alignment procedure:
1. During the IF AFC-parameter adjustment, one can see OSD feedback on the screen.
2. The OSD feedback at the top of the screen can give 4 kinds of messages:
1. The first item (IN/OUT) informs you whether you are in
or out of the AFC-window.
2. The second item (HIGH/LOW) informs you whether the
AFC-frequency is too high or too low.
3. Adjust the IF AFC parameter until the first value is
within the AFC window (= IN).
4. Next, adjust the IF AFC parameter until the second
value is LOW.
Table 8-1 AFC OSD feedback of AFC alignment
AFC-window AFC-frequency vs. reference
Out High
In High
[ In ] [ Low ]
Out Low
IF LPRIME AFC
Same procedure as described above, but with other signal source (SECAM L').
TUNER AGC
1. Connect the RF output of a video pattern generator to the antenna input.
2. From the generator, input a PAL B/G TV signal with a signal strength of approximately 2 mV and a frequency of
475.25 MHz.
3. Measure the DC voltage on pin 1 of the (main) Tuner. You can adjust this voltage by adjusting the TUNER AGC item in the SAM menu. Alignment is correct when the DC voltage is just below 3.5 V.
Table 8-2 2fH ADC alignment
Menu item Alignment value
RED GAIN RGB 111 BLUE GAIN RGB 117 GREEN GAIN RGB 157 RED OFFSET RGB 59 BLUE OFFSET RGB 52 GREEN OFFSET RGB 46 RED GAIN YPBPR 111 BLUE GAIN YPBPR 117 GREEN GAIN YPBPR 137 ("GREEN GAIN RGB" minus
"20" ) RED OFFSET YPBPR 59 BLUE OFFSET YPBPR 52 GREEN OFFSET YPBPR 46

8.3.3 White point alignment

Table 8-3 Default values white point alignment.
Menu item Alignment value
Test Pattern NO / YES (no function) WhitePointRed 127 (depends on color temperature) WhitePointGreen 127 (depends on color temperature) WhitePointBlue 127 (depends on color temperature) Red BL offset 7 Green BL offset 7 Color Temperature NORMAL / WARM / COOL
Ignore “Test Pattern” item in the alignment menu, this is not implemented. Method 1 (with colour analyser)
1. Supply, via an external VGA source (e.g. a PC with 640x480 mode, or a VGA generator), a 'White Drive' test pattern (ask your NSO). This picture consists of a black picture with in the middle a 100% white square.
2. Select the color temperature to adjust (default NORMAL).
3. Measure with a CTV colour analyser (calibrated with the
spectra) on the centre of the white square on the screen.
4. Adjust with the CURSOR UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT command, the three white points Red, Green and Blue. Max. value is 127. Align with one or two of the drivers to the correct coordinates (see table of color coordinates).
5. Repeat the same measurement for respectively colour temperature WARM and COOL.
BLEND INTENSITY
Use this alignment when you replace the microcontroller, NVM, or the EBILD. It aligns the level of transparency of the menu­picture blended into the main-picture. Fixed setting of "16".
FBX TESTPATTERN
This function makes it possible to generate a test pattern varying from full black to full white in eight steps. You can use this pattern to check the video path, starting at the FBX to the plasma display. The pattern is generated by the Eagle (IC7724) for PixelPlus sets, or by the PICNIC (IC7713) for non-PixelPlus sets.
Note: This test pattern can also be very useful for checking the display for pixel failures.

8.3.2 2FH ADC ALIGNMENT

Only necessary to align, when the EPLD or NVM is replaced. Use the default values as mentioned in the table.
Table 8-4 Color coordinates
Color Temperature x y
6500 Warm 0.313 0.329 9400 Normal 0.285 0.290 11500 Cool 0.269 0.289
Method 2 (without colour analyser) Without a CTV colour analyser, it is possible to set some parameters, which are based on average values from production.
Table 8-5 Color temperature RGB values
Color Temperature R G B
6500 Warm 127 119 107 9400 Normal 127 122 124 11500 Cool 119 125 127
Page 31
Electrical Alignments
EN 91FTP1.1E 8.

8.3.4 LUM. DEL.

With this Luminance Delay alignment, you place the luminance information exactly on the chrominance information (brightness is pushed onto the colour). Use a colour bar / grey scale pattern as test signal.
LUM. DELAY PAL BG: Apply a PAL BG colour bar / grey
scale pattern as a test signal. Adjust this parameter until the transients of the colour part and black and white part of the test pattern are at the same position. Default value is "8".
LUM. DELAY PAL I: Apply a PAL I colour bar/grey scale
pattern as a test signal. Adjust this parameter until the transients of the colour part and black and white part of the test pattern are at the same position. Default value is "8".
LUM. DELAY SECAM: Apply a SECAM colour bar/grey
scale pattern as a test signal. Adjust this parameter until the transients of the colour part and black and white part of the test pattern are at the same position. Default value is "7".
LUM. DELAY BYPASS: apply a NTSC colour bar/
greyscale pattern as a test signal. Adjust this value until the

8.4.2 DEALER OPTIONS

Table 8-6 Dealer Options Overview
Menu name Subjects Options Physically in set
Personal Options Picture Mute Yes Picture mute active in case no picture detected
No Noise in case of no picture detected
Virgin Mode Yes TV starts up (once) with language selection menu after mains switch "on" for the first
No TV does not starts up (once) with language selection menu after mains switch "on" for
Auto Store Mode None Autostore mode disabled (not in installation menu)
PDC-VPS Autostore mode via ATS (PDC/VPS) enabled TXT page Autostore mode via ACI enabled PDC-VPS-TXT Autostore mode via ACI or ATS enabled
TXT Preference TOP Preference to TOP Teletext
FLOF Preference to FLOF Teletext
transients of the colour and black and white part of the test area are at the same position. Default value is "6".

8.4 Option Settings

8.4.1 Introduction

The microprocessor communicates with a large number of I2C ICs in the set. To ensure good communication and to make digital diagnosis possible, the microprocessor has to know which ICs to address. The presence / absence of these specific ICs (or functions) is made known by the option codes.
Notes:
After changing the option(s), save them with the STORE command.
The new option setting is only active after the TV is switched "off" and "on" again with the Mains switch (the EAROM is then read again).
time (virgin mode)
the first time (virgin mode)
Page 32
EN 92 FTP1.1E8.

8.4.3 SERVICE OPTIONS

Select the sub menu's to set the initialisation codes (options) of the set via text menus.
Table 8-7 Option overview
Menu-item Subjects Options Description
Chassis/Region Region AP Only for AP.
Teletext Flash RAM Yes Flash RAM present
NexTView None Feature not present
Display Options Display Technology PDP "Grayed out" in menu, fixed value.
Size 37" Panel size (in inches).
Display type 16:9 Widescreen screen format.
Video Repro Featurebox type Falconic No "Eagle" present (only "Natural Motion").
Lightsensor Yes Feature present.
2D Combfilter Yes Feature present.
Picture improvement Yes LTP (TOPIC) present.
Signalling bits Yes For 16:9 sets
Audio Repro AVL Yes Automatic Volume Limiter, available in menu.
Miscellaneous Home Cinema Yes Set with Home Cinema Link (EU only).
Integrated RC Yes Feature present.
Tuner type UV1316 Set with Philips tuner.
P50 DVD menu line Yes Sets with Home Cinema Link (EU only).
Hotel mode Yes Hotel mode on
Option no. Group 1 Group 1 option code overview (see set sticker).
Group 2 Group 2 option code overview (see set sticker).
Electrical Alignments
Europe Only for Europe
No Flash RAM not present
Textguide only Feature present, but only as text guide. Nextview 2 Feature present, for countries that support this. Nextview 2c3 Feature present, for countries that support this.
42" Panel size (in inches).
4:3 "Classic" screen format.
Eagle "Eagle" present (Pixel Plus).
No Feature not present.
No Feature not present.
No LTP (TOPIC) not present.
No For 4:3 sets
No Automatic Volume Limiter not available in menu.
No Set without Home Cinema Link
No Feature not present.
TEDE9 Set with Alps tuner.
No Sets without Home Cinema Link.
No Hotel mode off

8.4.4 OPT. NO. (Option numbers)

Select this sub menu to set all options at once (expressed in two long strings of numbers).
An option number (or "option byte") represents a number of different options. When you change these numbers directly, you can set all options very quickly. All options are controlled via eight option numbers. When the EAROM is replaced, all options will require resetting. To be certain that the factory settings are reproduced exactly, you must set both option number lines. You can find the correct option numbers on a sticker inside the TV set (just below the main power supply on the metal frame).
Example: The options sticker gives the following option numbers:
20556 24610 49410 00000
00022 00001 00034 02752
The first line (group 1) indicates options 1 to 4, the second line (group 2) options 5 to 8 (see tables below). Every 5-digit number represents 16 bits (so the maximum number will be 65536 if all options are set). When all the correct options are set, the sum of the decimal values of each Option Byte (OB) will give the option number.
Service tip: An easy way to check the option numbers is:
1. Convert the decimal option number (as given on the options sticker) to a binary number (e.g. by means of the 'scientific' calculator that comes with MS Windows™). E.g. OB3= 49408 (dec)= 1100000100000000 (bin)
2. Use this binary number to check against the bits as mentioned in the tables below. This means in above­mentioned sample, that Bit 8, 14, and 15 are "1" (means "set"), and that the rest is "0". So, actually this means that the options "Aspect Ratio" (Bit 8), "Home Cinema" (Bit
14), and "Integrated RC" (Bit 15) are set for this particular model.
Page 33
Electrical Alignments
EN 93FTP1.1E 8.
Table 8-8 Option bytes Group 1
Byte nr. Bit nr. Decimal value Option name Settings (in decimal values) Option Byte value
0 1 Featurebox 0= None (n.a.) 2= Prozonic (n.a.)
12 24 3 8 2D Comb Filter 0= Off 8= On 416 n.a. 0 532 n.a. 0
OB1
OB2
OB3
OB4
Notes:- n.a.= not applicable.- AP-P= Asian Pacific PAL-multi, AP-N= Asian Pacific NTSC, EU= Europe, LA= Latin America, US= NAFTA.
6 64 Light Sensor 0= Off 64= On 7 128 Luma Trans. Proc. 0= Off 128= On 8 256 n.a. 0
9 512 n.a. 0 10 1024 n.a. 0 11 2048 n.a. 0 12 4096 WSS 0= Off (US/LA/AP-N) 4096= On (EU/AP-P) 13 8192 3D Comb Filter 0= Off (EU/AP-P) 8192= On (US/LA/AP-N) 14 16384 n.a. 0 15 32768 n.a. 0
01 n.a. 0
12 n.a. 0
24 n.a. 0
38 n.a. 0
416 n.a. 0
5 32 Virtual Dolby 0= Off (Dolby prologic) 32= On
664 n.a. 0
7 128 n.a. 0
8 256 n.a. 0
9 512 n.a. 0 10 1024 n.a. 0 11 2048 n.a. 0 12 4096 n.a. 0 13 8192 Flash RAM 0= Off 8192= On 14 16384 EPG Type (EU only) 0= Type2 16384= Textguide only
15 32768
01 n.a. 0
12 n.a. 0
24 n.a. 0
38 n.a. 0
416 n.a. 0
532 n.a. 0
664 n.a. 0
7 128 n.a. 0
8 256 Aspect Ratio 0= 4:3 256= 16:9
9 512 n.a. 0 10 1024 n.a. 0 11 2048 n.a. 0 12 4096 n.a. 0 13 8192 n.a. 0 14 16384 Home Cinema 0= Off (US/LA/AP) 16384= On (EU) 15 32768 Integrated RC (P50) 0= Off (US) 32768= On (EU/LA/AP)
01 n.a. 0
12 n.a. 0
24 n.a. 0
38 n.a. 0
416 n.a. 0
532 n.a. 0
664 n.a. 0
7 128 n.a. 0
8 256 n.a. 0
9 512 n.a. 0 10 1024 n.a. 0 11 2048 n.a. 0 12 4096 n.a. 0 13 8192 n.a. 0 14 16384 n.a. 0 15 32768 n.a. 0
3= Eagle 4= Falconic (n.a.) 5= Falconic+ (n.a.)
32768= NextTView 2C3 49152= NexTView 2
(decimal)
OB1= sum of the "on" bits
(decimal)
OB2= sum of the "on" bits
(decimal)
OB3= sum of the "on" bits
(decimal)
OB4= sum of the "on" bits
Page 34
EN 94 FTP1.1E8.
Table 8-9 Option bytes Group 2
Electrical Alignments
Byte nr. Bit nr. Decimal values Option name
01 n.a.0 1 2 Auto Store Mode 0= None (US/LA/AP-N) 2= PDC/VPS (EU)
24 38 n.a.0 4 16 Picture Mute 0= Off 16= On 532 n.a.0
OB5
OB6
OB7
OB8
Notes: - n.a.= not applicable.- AP-P= Asian Pacific PAL-multi, AP-N= Asian Pacific NTSC, EU= Europe, LA= Latin America, US= NAFTA.
6 64 Virgin Mode 0= Off 64= On 7 128 Hotel Mode 0= Off 128= On 8 256 n.a. 0
9 512 n.a. 0 10 1024 n.a. 0 11 2048 n.a. 0 12 4096 TXT Preference 0= TOP 4096= FLOF 13 8192 n.a. 0 14 16384 n.a. 0 15 32768 n.a. 0
0 1 P50 DVD menu-line 0= Off (US/LA/AP) 1= On (EU)
12 n.a.0
24 n.a.0
38 n.a.0
4 16 Region 0= EU 16= AP PAL-multi
532
664
7128
8 256 n.a. 0
9 512 n.a. 0 10 1024 n.a. 0 11 2048 n.a. 0 12 4096 n.a. 0 13 8192 n.a. 0 14 16384 n.a. 0 15 32768 n.a. 0
01 n.a.0
12 n.a.0
24 n.a.0
38 n.a.0
416 n.a.0
532 n.a.0
664 n.a.0
7 128 n.a. 0
8 256 n.a. 0
9 512 n.a. 0 10 1024 n.a. 0 11 2048 n.a. 0 12 4096 n.a. 0 13 8192 n.a. 0 14 16384 n.a. 0 15 32768 n.a. 0
01 n.a.0
12 n.a.0
24 n.a.0
38 n.a.0
416 n.a.0
532 n.a.0
664 n.a.0
7 128 n.a. 0
8 256 Picture tube size 0= 30 inch 256= 32 inch
9512 10 1024 11 2048 12 4096 Display type 0= LCD 4096= PDP 13 8192 14 16384 n.a. 0 15 32768 n.a. 0
Settings (in decimal values) Option Byte value
4= TXT Page (EU) 6= PDC/VPS/TXTpage (EU)
32= AP NTSC 48= US
512= 37 inch 768= 42 inch
(decimal)
OB5= sum of the "on" bits
(decimal)
OB6= sum of the "on" bits
(decimal)
OB7= sum of the "on" bits
(decimal)
OB8= sum of the "on" bits
Page 35
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

9. Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

EN 95FTP1.1E 9.
Index of this chapter:
1. Introduction
2. Block diagram
3. Power supply
4. Input/Output (I/O)
5. Video Processing
6. Audio
7. Synchronisation
8. Control
9. Protections
10. PDP Panel
11. Software upgrading
12. Abbreviation list
13. IC Data Sheets
Notes:
Only new circuits (circuits that are not published recently)
are described.
For the other "known" circuits, see:EM5E manual. This manual is available under number
3122 785 12560 (= English).
– EM6E manual. This manual is available under number
3122 785 13070 (= English).
– FM24 manual. This manual is available under number
3122 785 12770 (= English).
Figures can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to different set executions.
For a good understanding of the following circuit descriptions, please use the wiring, block and circuit diagrams. Where necessary, you will find a separate drawing for clarification.
Where EBILD (Eagle Based Intelligent LCD Driver) is mentioned, please note that the SW for this programmable device is optimised for PDP.
Further features of the SSP are:
The 3D Comb filter functionality (for USA) is integrated on the SSP.
The rear I/O connections (like SCART and cinch) are integrated on the SSP, even as the tuner.
VGA input (for Europe).
DVI input (only for USA).
On the photographs you can see where all the functional cells are located on the SSP:

9.1 Introduction

The FTP11 is a 42-inch integrated PDP flat screen set, which uses the EM6 small signal panel. The HOP part is replaced by an Erasable Programmable Logic Device (EPLD). This chassis has no PIP, no FDW, and no TXT-DW. Also, features like Dolby, DVD-loader, HDD, and/or radio are not present. In this chapter, the European version is described. In some cases also the US version is described.

9.1.1 Features

This chassis has the following (new) features:
Next step "Active Control" with: two new bars ("Motion" and "Tint Control" bar), four split demos, etc.
Small Signal Panel (SSP) that is based on the existing EM6 architecture: a full panel with integrated (shielded) Feature Box as in the former MG-chassis. This approach gives better EMC / crosstalk behaviour and less cables.
Upgradeable main software (via ComPair).

9.1.2 Small Signal Panel

The SSP is a high tech module (four layer, 2 sides reflow technology, full SMC) with very high component density and partial shielding (FBX, EBILD) for EMC-reasons. Despite this, it is designed in such a way, that repair on component level is possible. To achieve this, attention was paid to:
Clearance around surface mounted ICs (for replacing).
Detailed diagnostics and fault finding is possible via
ComPair.
Software upgrading is possible via ComPair.
Page 36
EN 96 FTP1.1E9.
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
TO PDP PANEL
LVDS
DC/DC CONVERTER
ADC
VGA/RGB
EPLD
VGA
ADC
ADC
LVDS
CINCH
(AUDIO)
PIXEL PLUS
FM2
FM3
2V5
FBX (2FH)
OTC HIP
FM5
3V3
CINCH (EXT5)
OTC
MAIN
SW
FBX
SW
SCART
(EXT1/2)
AUDIO PROC.
DPL
MSP
XTL
HIP1
XTL
SCART
(EXT3/4)
DW/PIP
HIP 2
MUPPET
TUNER
I/O
HEADPHONE ANTENNA
SERVICE
CONNECTOR
IN
CL 36532075_049.eps
241103
TUNER
DW/PIP
Figure 9-1 SSP top view
DC/DC CONVERTER
AUDIO PROCESSOR FBX (2FH)
FMI
PICNIC
HIP
COMB
FILTER
I/O
OTC
FLASH
(EPG)
DRAM (TXT)
FALCONIC
PIXEL PLUS
DNM
FM4
EAGLE
VGA/RGB
ANTENNA
IN
SERVICE
CONNECTOR
HEADPHONE CINCH
SCART
(EXT 3/4)
SCART
(EXT 1/2)
(EXT5)
Figure 9-2 SSP bottom view
AUDIO
VGACINCH
CL 36532075_050.eps
171103
Page 37
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

9.2 Block Diagram

EN 97FTP1.1E 9.
CVBS 1
STATUS
EXT 1
FBL 1
TUN_CVBS
OUT
STATUS 2
Y/CVBS2
R2 C IN
EXT 2
B2 C OUT
FBL 2
Y/CVBS 2 OUT
CVBS 3
EXT 3
STATUS 3
Main Tuner
VIF OUT
Y/Cvbs ext 1/4 main
read_status 1
R1
G1
B1
read_status2
G2
From OTC
P50
cv
CIN
bs ext 3
rgb ext 1
YUV1fH
fbl ext 1
TUN_CVBS OUT
Y/CVBSrecordOut
G D
cvbs
ter
cvbs int cvbs 1
+
cvbs 2
y-cvbs 3 c3
y-cvbs 4 c4
FBL 1 in FBL 2 in
rgb1
rgb2
IF
PIP OUT
YYYCCC
SCART2 OUT
MAIN OUT
yuv 1fh
HIP
MAIN
CVBS pip out
+
PR OC
+
CVBS PIP
OUTmain
YUV MAIN
Y
C
Comb control
CVBS txt out main
set_rgb_main
2FH/3FH
INPUTS
FBX
COMB
CVBS TXT
EBILD
LVDS
transmitter
PDP
A/D
VD
HD3
OTC
Status 3
Status 4
I2C
P50 to scart 2
Keyboard input
RGB OTC
OTC blanking
CL 36532075_046.eps
201103

Figure 9-3 Block diagram FTP11

The main tuner is a PLL tuner and delivers the IF-signal, via audio and video SAW-filters, to the main HIP (High-end Input Processor). This HIP has the following functions:
IF modulation.
Video source select and record select (for 1fH inputs).
Colour decoder.
Synchronisation.
The following video input/output connections (with audio connections) are available for Europe:
Side: interfaces CVBS and Y/C.
EXT1: interfaces CVBS, RGB-, and YUV-input (1fH)
EXT2: interfaces CVBS and Y/C (meant for VCR or DVDR
connection).
EXT3: interfaces CVBS.
AV5: interfaces YPbPr (2fH/3fH).
AV6: interfaces VGA (2fH/3fH).
The HIP delivers YUV and H/V-sync signals to the PICNIC (in the Feature Box). This IC takes care of:
Analogue to Digital conversion and vice versa.
100 Hz processing
Interlaced to progressive scan conversion.
Panorama mode.
Noise reduction.
Dynamic contrast.
After the PICNIC, the YUV-signals are fed to the FALCONIC for "Natural Motion", followed by the Eagle for picture enhancement. The processed YUV signals (from Eagle or PICNIC) are, together with the sync-signals from the PICNIC, then fed to the EBILD (Eagle Based Intelligent LCD Driver). This programmed IC handles the video control. The RGB­signals for TXT/CC/OSD (from the uP) are also inserted via this IC. The video part delivers the RGB signals to the PDP-panel.
The sound part is built around an MSP (Multi-channel Sound Processor) for IF sound detection, sound control and source selection. Amplification is done via a "class D" integrated power amplifier IC, the TDA7490.
The microprocessor, called OTC (OSD, TXT/CC and Control) takes care of the analogue TXT input processing and output processing. The OTC, ROM, and RAM are supplied with 3.3 V. The NVM (Non Volatile Memory) is used to store the settings; the Flash-RAM contains the set software.

9.3 Power Supply

For Service this supply-panel is a black box. When defect (this can be traced via error-codes in the error buffer, or by strange phenomena), a new panel must be ordered, and after receipt, the defective panel must be send for repair. In that case before sending it, check if the supply-output lines match with the values on the PDP-sticker.
Page 38
EN 98 FTP1.1E9.
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

9.3.1 Power Balance

Table 9-1 Total power balance overview
Voltage Value Current
P_max Remarks
(max)
+3V3-DISP 3.3 V 3.6 12 +5V-DISP 5 V 0.8 4 +5V2-DISP 5.2 V 0.3 1.6 Standby voltage +8V-DISP 8.6 V 0.4 3.4 +9V-STBY 9 V ­+9V-STBY-SW 9 V -

9.3.2 Switch On/Off

Via the ON/OFF knob on the side the set can be switched “on” or “off”, although when “off” not all power is removed. Only by disconnecting the mains power cord from the power socket all power is really gone.

9.3.3 Power States

There are four different power states. Some characteristics of these are summarised in the "Power states" table.
Table 9-2 Power states overview
On/Off
Power state
OUT (mainscord disconnected)
OFF OFF Only standby supply is working OTC not
STAND BY (1) ON Standby supply is working Red LED is "on" (in
SEMI STAND BY ON Standby supply is working
ON ON The set is working Green LED is "on" (in
switch Remarks
XNo power
powered Main supply not working No LED is "on"
Europe and in US)
Main supply is working PDP is not active EPG loading and P50 recording possible (Europe) Time extraction (Europe and US) Red and Green LEDs are "on"
Europe and in US)
Events from OFF to SEMI-STANDBY or ON
(See also figure "Step wise start-up diagram" in chapter "Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding").
1. The set is in "off" state until the ON/OFF switch is switched to "on". The standby voltage +5V-DISP becomes available, the OTC resets, the I/O pins are initialised, and the watchdog is enabled. The set comes in standby mode.
The sets leaves the stand by mode if:A time extraction must be started (after every start up).A P50 recording has to start.An EPG loading has to start.The Standby bit is set to "off"; when a user switches on
the set, the standby bit is also set to "off".
2. The STANDBY line is set to "low", the +5V_SW is "on", the relay closes, and the LCD AUX supply starts up (8V6 is present).
3. The rest of the ICs are initialised. The EBILD is initialised min 400 ms after the standby line is set to "low".
4. If the standby bit was set, the set goes into semi-standby until:
The time extraction is done.The P50 recording has finished.The EPG loading has finished.
5. If the standby bit was not set, the PDP is switched "on". The
PWR-OK-PDP signal from the supply is received at the EBILD to inform the main processor of proper operating PDP supply.
Events in SEMI-STANDBY
1. The set can be in semi-standby during Time extraction, EPG loading, or P50 (Easylink) recording. The semi­standby state is ended when:
Time extraction has finished.P50 recording has finished.EPG loading has finished.A P50 recording starts during EPG loading.A user event "On" or "Standby". The set goes into protection.
2. If the standby bit is not set (after user event), the PDP is
switched "on".
3. If a P50 recording or an EPG loading has to start, the set stays in semi-standby. If the P50 recording has to start during EPG loading, the P50 has priority.
4. If there is no P50 recording or EPG loading, the set goes to standby.
Events from ON to SEMI-STANDBY/STANDBY
1. The set can be switched to standby:Via the RC (to semi-standby).Via the MENU button on the top control, long press (to
semi stand by).
Via a protection (to standby).
2. The running instructions are finished.
3. The PDP is switched "off"; this is controlled by the OTC by
means of the STANDBY line.
Sound is mutedIf there was a protection, the STANDBY line is put
"high", and the set goes to standby.
4. If there was no protection, the set goes to semi-standby.
5. After an event in semi-standby, the set goes to standby.
6. Protections are disabled.
7. The OTC sets the STANDBY line "high", this switches "off"
the main power supply, and only the standby supply remains working.
8. The set is in standby.

9.4 Input/Output (I/O)

9.4.1 Introduction

The chassis follows the standard SCART specification:
The presence of the incoming source is detected via pin 8 of the SCART signal.
The Aspect Ratio of the incoming source is derived from the voltage level on SCART pin 8. The pin 8 information is handled by the HIP for SCART 1 and 2 and by the OTC for SCART 3.
The P50 in/out is handled via P1-4 and P3-7 of the OTC.
RGB sources break in with an additional fast blanking
signal that is detected by the HIP. The HIP then internally chooses other signal processing. RGB sources that only have fast blanking and no pin 8 status do not overrule the main TV source. There is no automatic break in detection for the front input.
The HIP for further image processing does the detection between Y/C and CVBS automatically.
When Y/C is detected, the HIP will add Y and C signal to compose CVBS again. This addition should be overruled by software at the moment any Y/C signal is the source and the presence of a P50 Y/C video recorder is detected: only Y signal is directed to record out (C is already hardwired to EXT 2 out). Note: P50: Chroma-out is pin 7, Chroma-in is pin 15. Non­P50: both Chroma-out and -in is pin 15 (hardwiring C to pin 7 out; non-P50 not supported).
The signal on MONITOR_OUT follows the incoming source, except in case the incoming source is EXT2, YPbPr-2fH, or VGA. Then the output signal should be FRONTEND_OUT.
Page 39
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
Note: The SCART input (1fH) path is equal to the one described in the EM6E manual. Therefore, it is not described in much detail here.

9.4.2 Input detection

The RGB or YPbPr input signals (2fH/3fH) are sent to the ADC (AD9883A) together with H and V pulses from DVI (USA) or VGA (EUR), and the Y signal from YPbPr called Sync On Green (green is same line as Y). The AD converter:
Detects via H and V sync, if RGB is present or not.
Detects via Sync On Green, if YPbPr is present or not.
Detects the selected sync.
Selects the sync switch via I2C.
Does AD conversion to 848 samples per line, 8 bits in 422
format. This means one bus for Y signal with 8 bits and one bus for UV with 4 U and 4 V bits. Depending on the system detected by EBILD, the sample frequency is changed. Via I2C, the "PLL_DIV" signal is given in 11 bits (2 Bytes).
When a 1fH input is detected, the AD converter is set in tristate.
1fH input flow
START1Fh selection
Mute sound, Blank picture
EN 99FTP1.1E 9.
Put ADC: power down
Put PICNIC: freerun OFF
Set FBX, see lookup table
Set EBILD, see lookup table
Demute sound, Unblank picture
1FH
CL 36532053_080.eps
170703
Figure 9-4 Flowchart 1fH detection
1. If a 1fH selection is done (except for AV4 in USA), the sound is muted and the picture is blanked.
2. The ADC is powered down.
3. The PICNIC is not in free run.
4. Both FBX and EBILD are set in 1fH (see lookup table).
5. Sound is demuted and picture is unblanked.
Page 40
EN 100 FTP1.1E9.
2fH/3fH input flow
AV5 or AV6 Eur AV4 or AV5 US
Selection
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
START
Put ADC: full power
Mute sound, Blank picture
AV4 on US ?
wait 200 msec
yes
no
Put picnic: freerun ON
Put ADC on last status from select. input
get Ebild: samples/line, lines/field=STDET1
wait >20 msec
get Ebild: samples/line, lines/field=STDET2
wait >20 msec
get Ebild: samples/line, lines/field=STDET3
STDET1=2=3?
yes
Supp standard ?
yes
same standard as last status?
no
Set ADC, see tookup table
no
1Fh detection in HIP?
yes
Put picnic to 1FH
Put picnic: freerun OFF
Unblank, demute
Set ADC to default value
no
no
ADC to default value ?
no
yes
wait >20 msec
get Ebild: samples/line, lines/field=STDET1
wait >20 msec
get Ebild: samples/line, lines/field=STDET2
wait >20 msec
get Ebild: samples/line, lines/field=STDET3
STDET1=2=3?
yes
Supp standard ?
yes
Store standard as last status selected input
Set FBX, see lookup table
Set EBILD, see lookup table
Unblank, demute
yes
no
no
set Ebild: blue mute
OSD: Message
wait: 200 msec
Figure 9-5 Flowchart 2fH/3fH detection
CL 36532053_079.eps
160703
Page 41
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
EN 101FTP1.1E 9.
1. The standard detection starts with a 2fH/3fH selection (this is AV5 / AV6 in Europe or AV4 / AV5 in USA).
2. The ADC is full powered (it was powered down in 1fH).
3. The sound is muted and the picture is blanked.
4. On AV4 in USA, an 1fH and 2fH/3fH signal can enter. This
detection is done by the HIP. When 1fH is detected, the FBX is set to 1fH, the PICNIC is not in free run, the picture is unblanked, and the sound is demuted. The set is in 1fH state. This state is continues checked, because the input can change from 1fH to 2fH/3fH.
5. If the input is 2fH/3fH, the PICNIC is set to free run
6. The ADC is set to the last status from this selected input,
because there is a big chance that the same standard is wanted.
7. The number of samples per line and lines per field is collected from the EBILD. The check is done three times. If the same value is measured within some tolerances (see lookup table) the standard is valid. The time between two measurements must be at least one frame or 20 ms.
Table 9-3 I/O lookup table
Selected Input Standard x fH FBX ADC EPLD Field Rate
Tuner, SC1..SC3. 480i 1 fH PICNIC
576i 1 fH PICNIC
AV5 (Cinch) 480p 2 fH EAGLE YPbPr YPbPr 60 Hz
576p 2 fH EAGLE YPbPr YPbPr 50 Hz 1080i / 60 Hz 2 fH EAGLE YPbPr YPbPr 60 Hz 1080i / 50 Hz 2 fH EAGLE YPbPr YPbPr 50 Hz 720p / 60 Hz 3 fH / 720p EAGLE YPbPr YPbPr 720p / 50 Hz 3 fH / 720p EAGLE YPbPr YPbPr
AV6 (VGA) 480p 2 fH EAGLE RGB 60 Hz
576p 2 fH EAGLE RGB 50 Hz 1080i / 60 Hz 2 fH EAGLE RGB 60 Hz 1080i / 50 Hz 2 fH EAGLE RGB 50 Hz 720p / 60 Hz 3 fH / 720p EAGLE RGB 720p / 50 Hz 3 fH / 720p EAGLE RGB VGA 2 fH EAGLE RGB 60 Hz SVGA 2 fH EAGLE RGB 56 Hz
8. If the ADC has not the right settings, the PLL does not lock, and the "STDET" measurements do not give the same results. The ADC is set to its default value; this value is able to catch all supported standards. If the ADC is already in the default value and no standard detection is possible, the set changes to blue mute.
9. If the standard is not supported, the set changes to blue mute via the EBILD, and a message is displayed.
10. If the standard is the same as the last status, the ADC is in the correct state, an both FBX and EBILD are set (see lookup table).
11. If the standard is changed, the ADC is set to the detected standard and a new check is done. If the standard is valid and supported, the new standard is stored in NVM as last status.
12. The FBX and EBILD are set (see lookup table)
13. Picture is unblanked and sound demuted.

9.5 Video Processing

9.5.1 Introduction

Note: The FBX processing part is equal to the one described in the EM6E manual. Therefore, it is not described here (except for some basic info).
There are two diversities (see also figure "Block diagram FTP11" in paragraph "Block Diagram"):
Europe: 3 SCARTs, 1 x 2fH/3fH inputs (YPbPr), and 1 VGA input
USA: 3 AV inputs1 (AV4 can be 1fH or 2fH/3fH YPbPr), and a DVI 2fH/3fH input.
Note: There is also an AP version available. This version has no difference w.r.t. the European version, but comes with extra cables and some different option settings.
Short overview of video processing The video processing is based on four key functions, being:
The HIP + comb filter (for simple source select and video/ chroma processing).
The EBILD that takes over the video control functions of the HOP (as used in CRT based sets).
The FBX configuration consisting of a PICNIC (100 Hz featuring), a FALCONIC (motion compensation and Auto TV featuring), and an EAGLE ("Pixel Plus" processing).
A 2fH/3fH source selection.
Additionally, the following features are added
One-chip NEC 3D comb filter (only for USA): this comb filter uses spatial and temporal filtering for the elimination of cross colour and cross luminance components. Not only for vertical lines, but also for stationary diagonal lines. This comb filter only supports the NTSC standard.
The light sensor measurement required for "Active Control" is done by the OTC.
Basic functionality of HIP
I/O functionality
The HIP selects the signals entering on 1fH base band. The HIP contains a source select matrix in order to handle a Tuner, three CVBS sources, two Y/C sources, and two RGB inputs (this in fact means one VIF input for tuner, four CVBS inputs with among them two Y/C inputs, and two RGB inputs). The HIP detects by itself whether the source is Y/C or CVBS, and decides how to handle the signal for further image processing. For Record Out, the signal is handled by software: if a P50 SVHS VCR is present and the signal to be recorded is Y/C, an Y/C signal should be passed to the VCR.
There are also two inputs for the OTC that will handle status detection, other, or more detection. In case of RGB, the fast blanking signal (FBL) determines the break­through of the RGB1/YPbPr signal if activated beforehand by the user. If a YPbPr-1fH connection was done, then it is equally handled by the RGB1 input without using the internal matrix. The HIP delivers the main video output (YUV- 1fH signal) for further image processing and three
Page 42
EN 102 FTP1.1E9.
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
CVBS outputs, being: CVBS PIP/DS, CVBS_TXT_OUT for comb filter (always following YUV main!) and TXT processing, and the CVBS/Y_RECORD_OUT for EXT2.
IF functionality
The HIP contains a multi standard IF circuit for video demodulation with AFC functionality, a sound IF amplifier, and an AM demodulator. An extra group delay correction is included.
Chroma demodulation and video processing
Sync acquisition, delivering H_A/V_A (Horizontal/Vertical
Acquisition) towards FBX.
Basic functionality of EBILD
The EBILD is the interface between the FBX and the PDP screen. Its principal functions are:
Video control functions of the HOP (Saturation, Contrast, Brightness).
OSD and TXT insertion with blending.
Video Matrix (NTSC, ATSC, PAL).
For matrix displays additional functions like:

9.5.2 Video Source Selection

Table 9-4 Video input overview
Contrast reserve (peak limiter), Sync wheel, Dithering (matrix displays are 8 bit), Generation of correct timing for PDP display.
I2C and SNERT bus.
Sync control.
Odd/Even field detection.
A/D converter alignment for OSD.
H Sync generation for OTC.
Control lines.
Standard detection.
Handle shifts of VD.
Suppress H and V pulses in active video.
Generate a H_REF for PICNIC (1fH) in case of a 2fH/3fH
source.
Basic functionality of the OTC
The OTC combines the microprocessor and TXT/OSD functionality; it will also handle some of the status detections. It also takes care of P50 communication.
I/O
EXT1 SCART Main Yes Yes, frontend No No Yes No No No Yes No
EXT2 SCART Main Yes Yes, WYSIWYR Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes
EXT3 SCART Main Yes No No No No No No No Yes No
AV5 cinch Main No No No No No Yes Yes No Only video det. No
AV6 VGA Main No No No No No No No Yes Only video det. No
The High Definition Input (HDI) part has two input "ports". Each port consists of a video input and an audio input. The ports are named "VGA" (= AV6) and "AV5" and will be referred to using these names.
The physical connectors for these inputs are:
AV5. Three cinches that can be used for YPbPr with sync on Y and two cinches for analogue Audio (left and right).
VGA. One VGA connector and two cinches for analogue Audio (left and right).
Table 9-5 AV5 (YPbPr) input signals
AV5 Inputs
(YPbPr)
576 p PAL 50 Hz 31.25 kHz
480 p NTSC 60 Hz 31.5 kHz 1080 i ATSC 60 Hz 33.7 kHz 1080 i ATSC 50 Hz 28.125 kHz
720 p ATSC 50 Hz 37.5 kHz
720 p ATSC 60 Hz 45 kHz
Main/Sub
CVBS-in
Sub Yes n.a. No n.a. No No No No Yes No
Sub Yes n.a. Yes n.a. Yes No No No Yes Yes
Sub Yes n.a. No n.a. No No No No Yes No
Sub No n.a. No n.a. No Yes No No Only video det. No
Sub No n.a. No n.a. No No No No n.a. No
System Field freq.
(V)
CVBS-out
Line freq.
(H)
Y/C-in
Y/C-out
RGB 1fH+ FBL
YPbPr 1fH
YPbPr 2fH/3fH
RGB 2fH
Status 4/3-16/9
P50
Page 43
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
Table 9-6 AV6 (VGA) input signals
EN 103FTP1.1E 9.
AV6 Inputs
System Field freq. (V) Line freq. (H)
(VGA)
VGA 640x480 60 Hz 31.5 kHz
SVGA 800x600 56 Hz 35.1 kHz
576 p PAL 50 Hz 31.25 kHz
480 p NTSC 60 Hz 31.5 kHz 1080 i ATSC 60 Hz 33.7 kHz 1080 i ATSC 50 Hz 28.125 kHz
720 p ATSC 50 Hz 37.5 kHz
720 p ATSC 60 Hz 45 kHz

9.5.3 Video Processing

USA
DVI
EUROPE
VGA
Y Pb Pr
SILICON
EPROM
H-SYNC-DVI V-SYNC-DVI
RGB
H-SYNC- VGA
V- SYNC-VGA
Matrix RGB
YUV
Y(SOG )
TDA8601
Video
SW
AD9883A
A/D
EPL D
Y -2FH -0...7
U-2FH- 0...7
V- 2FH-0 ...7
UV-2FH-0.. .7
Y -2FH -0... 7
FM
FM
Y
U
V
FM
Falconi cPicnic
Figure 9-6 Video processing 2fH/3fH input
The outputs toward the electronics of the set consist of:
YUV-422.
H-2FH-AD-OUT and V-2FH-AD-OUT.
Left and right audio channels (analogue).
CLK-2FH.
Notes:
In case of 2fH inputs, the signal is (after detection via the EBILD) routed through the FBX for picture improvement. The YUV output of the Eagle is then routed to the EBILD for the displaying part.
In case of 3fH inputs, the signal is not routed via the FBX (because the Eagle cannot handle them), but directly processed by the EBILD.

9.5.4 Miscellaneous

Comb Filter
The comb filter functionality can be enabled or disabled via the HIP. This means allowing or disallowing the HIP to use the
SCL-F3
SDA-F3
YOUT(0.. .9)
U_VOUT (0...9 )
TRISTA
TE
UVF
Y-2FH-0...7
UV-2FH-0...7
YF
BUFF
BUFF
YF-BUFF
UVF­BUFF
BU FF
FM
(lower lines )
BU FF
FM
(upper l ines)
Eagl e
UV demux
Contr ast satura tion bright ness
DS90C385
LVDS Transmitter
LVDS Connector
PDP
YUV
to
RGB
Contra st Res erve
AD A lignm ent
RGBBL-
OS D
insert ion
FDB-0...3
RGBBL-OSD
RGBBL-
TDA9805
A/D
CLK-OSD
OSD-0...5
OTC
CL 36532075_047.eps
201103
comb filter. Both the conventional 2D comb filter (EUR) and the 3D comb filter (USA) have to use this HIP command.
Notes:
The command ENABLE_COMBFILTER enables the function. If the TV standard that enters the TV is one where a comb filter is applicable (e.g. PAL or NTSC, not SECAM), the HIP will determine self if the video signal can be combed and as a consequence, the video processing output can be CVBS or Y/C. No software interaction is needed. Remark: Enabling the comb filter does not necessarily mean that the signals will be combed.
The comb filter must be disabled in case of RGB and for YPbPr-1fH, to avoid big horizontal shifts of the picture caused by the comb filter processing.
The comb filter is also disabled at very low quality antenna signals for AP due to vertical instability/scrolling effects.
Page 44
EN 104 FTP1.1E9.
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
Auto TV
The Auto Picture Control or in short AutoTV, aims at providing the customer the best possible picture performance at any time. Therefore, it performs real time processing of the video signal and because of that, it decides to adapt several video parameters throughout the whole chassis. The total effect of Auto Picture Control on the screen can be selected by the use of the remote control. The commercial name for the feature is "Active Control".
The sets have three digital options: Progressive Scan, Pixel Plus, and Movie Plus. The Progressive Scan mode has no Pixel Plus enhancement. For 2fH inputs, only Progressive Scan or Pixel Plus mode can be selected. For 3fH inputs no digital options are available. The aim of Movie Plus mode is to reduce the Halo artefacts (halo's are artefacts introduced with the Natural Motion feature). Reducing halo's will result in motion judder. This is compensated by the FBX software.
The basic component for Auto TV is the FBX. It measures the picture content and it has the most video control parameters on board, like peaking, coring, DNR, and so on. With the presence of the Eagle, additionally the colour enhancement functions and the LTI are controlled. Also, the light sensor, needed for ambient light control, is supported via the OTC. Finally, vertical peaking is mostly done in Eagle, a little in the PICNIC, and the motion compensation and DNR is done in the FALCONIC.
See also EM5 service manual.

9.6 Audio

9.6.1 Introduction

In this chassis, there are only Virtual Dolby sets, but there is diversity between Europe and USA sets.

9.6.2 Audio decoding

Two audio decoders will be used:
ITT MSP 3411: for Europe sets.
ITT MSP 3421: for USA sets.
Both MSP versions also decode NICAM. The AM signal is also decoded by the MSP.

9.6.3 Audio source selecting

AUDIO BLOC K DIAGRAM EUROPE
12
AV5(Ypbpr)
6
Side/VGA
5
4
SC4 SC3
3 2
SC2
1
SC1
C in
MAIN HIP
MAIN IN
TEA6422D
3
0X98
SIF/AM
I2S
SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4
MSP3411
ENC
DE
C
DEC
DEC
MON OUT
REG-SW
AUX OUT
NSM4556
FTV lipsync
delay
1S01
L/R LS
Headphone
CL 36532053_077.eps
SCART 1
SCART 2
MON OUT FRONT OUT
181103
For USA: AV1.AV2.AV4 (YPbPr 1fH or 2fH/3fH).AV5 (DVI).
There are three separated outputs on the matrix IC, but only the main output (MAIN_IN), going to the MSP, is used.
The MSP has the following inputs:
SIF input (this can be FM, AM, or NICAM).
MAIN_IN from matrix IC TEA6422D.
Centre input.
An S/PDIF in/output is not foreseen.

9.6.4 Audio processing

European sets have an MSP3411, USA sets have an MSP3421. Both can handle Virtual Dolby. All sets have 2 x 10 W_rms output. Following outputs are foreseen:
Europe:EXT1: Front-endEXT2: WYSIWYR.Monitor out: for external Dolby ProLogic amplifier.Headphone out.
USA:Monitor out: Front-end.Headphone out.
Important remarks
For Europe: Régimbeau switch (REG_SW): this switch (item 7I20) is needed to prevent feedback (Larsen effect). When EXT2 is chosen as incoming signal, the output of EXT2 following the main picture, is also EXT2. This will cause the Larsen effect. To prevent this, the record select must be switched to tuner. This is especially important when decoders are used (e.g. Canal + decoder) behind a "transparent" VCR connected to EXT2.
It is not allowed to mix up analogue and digital signals in the MSP; SCART-in towards SCART-out should be treated in the analogue source select part of the MSP. Reason for this, is the limited bandwidth in the MSP (16 kHz) while the analogue source selection part can carry up to 20 kHz.
If a 2fH/3fH source is selected, it is not possible to handle the video signal in the 1fH source selection. Since the video signal cannot be connected to EXT2, the output of EXT2 is switched to FRONTEND, and MONITOR OUT is WYSIWYR (same source as video).
Figure 9-7 Audio block diagram
The MSP covers a SIF input, 4 stereo inputs and one mono input. As this chassis needs more inputs, one matrix IC (TEA6422D, item 7I17) is added. The stereo inputs on this IC are:
For Europe: EXT1.EXT2.EXT3.AV5 (YPbPr 2fH/3fH).AV6 (VGA).
Page 45
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
EN 105FTP1.1E 9.

9.6.5 Audio Amplifier Panel (Diagram A)

Introduction
TWEETER LEFT
TWIN-CONE SPEAKER LEFT
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
L-POS
L-NEG
R-POS
R-NEG
AUDIO
ENABLE
SSP
7225-A
7225-B
63Hz
AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
MUTE
PSU
7260-A
L-HIGH
HPF
7238-A
L-LOW
LPF
7260-B
R-HIGH
HPF
7238-B
R-LOW
LPF
1kHz 3kHz
LOW
HIGH
(LPF)
(HPF)
TWEETER RIGHT
TWIN-CONE SPEAKER RIGHT
MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
6dB/OCT
Figure 9-8 Block diagram Audio Amplifier
This panel houses the audio filters and amplifiers necessary for driving the speakers. The differential audio inputs (for common mode immunity) come from the SSP (via connector 0388). The PSU delivers the positive and negative supply voltage of 12 V_dc, as well as the +5V2 (standby) voltage. After being filtered and amplified, the signals go to the speaker section, where the (twin cone) low/mid range speakers and the tweeters are driven (load impedance is 8 Ω).
The headphone amplifier is a straightforward OpAmp amplifier (IC7A07-A, MC33178D). It is supplied with +11V_AUD.
Supply (Diagram A7)
The supply voltage is a symmetrical voltage of +/- 14.5 V_dc, generated by the main supply via L5002.
V_SND_POS (+12 V_dc) on connector 0302 pin 5/6.
V_SND_NEG (-12 V_dc) on connector 0302 pin 1/2.
Filter (Diagram A2)
Electrical filtering is needed for following reasons:
Limiting the cone excursion, thereby reducing the distortion.
Increasing the power handling capacity (PHC).
Active second order Sallen-Key filters are used, with crossover frequencies of 1 kHz for the low pass filter, and 3 kHz for the high pass filter.
The audio signals are filtered before the amplifier. There are some reasons for doing this:
It is now easy to do active filtering.
Less costs (no expensive coils and capacitors).
L
HIGH LEFT
MID/LOW LEFT
R
HIGH RIGHT
MID/LOW RIGHT
CL36532053_081.eps
170703
High Pass Filter (HPF)
For L and R separately, a High Pass Filter (IC7260A and B) is processing L_HIGH and R_HIGH. The output signal of this filter is then fed to the audio amplifier (identical for right channel).
Amplifier (Diagrams A3 to A6)
Each speaker has its own class-D amplifier. These amplifiers combine a good performance with a high efficiency, resulting in a big reduction in heat generation.
Principle
Audio-power-amplifier systems have traditionally used linear amplifiers, which are well known for being inefficient. In fact, a linear Class AB amplifier is designed to act as a variable resistor network between the power supply and the load. The transistors operate in their linear region, and the voltage that is dropped across the transistors (in their role as variable resistors) is lost as heat, particularly in the output transistors. Class D amplifiers were developed as a way to increase the efficiency of audio-power-amplifier systems.
+V
-V
CL16532099_002.eps
200801
Figure 9-9 Principle Class-D Amplifier
The Class D amplifier works by varying the duty cycle of a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal. By comparing the input voltage to a triangle wave, the amplifier increases duty cycle to increase output voltage, and decreases duty cycle to decrease output voltage. The output transistors (item 7365 on diagram A3) of a Class D amplifier switch from 'full off' to 'full on' (saturated) and then back again, spending very little time in the linear region in between. Therefore, very little power is lost to heat. If the transistors have a low 'on' resistance (R_DS(ON)), little voltage is dropped across them, further reducing losses. A Low Pass Filter at the output passes only the average of the output wave, which is an amplified version of the input signal. In order to keep the distortion low, negative feedback is applied (via R3308). A second feedback loop (via R3310) is tapped after the output filter, in order to decrease the distortion at high frequencies.
The advantage of Class D is increased efficiency (= less heat dissipation). Class D amplifiers can drive the same output power as a Class AB amplifier using less supply current. The disadvantage is the large output filter that drives up cost and size. The main reason for this filter is that the switching waveform results in maximum current flow. This causes more loss in the load, which causes lower efficiency. An LC filter with a cut-off frequency less than the Class D switching frequency (350 kHz), allows the switching current to flow through the filter instead of the load. The filter is less lossy than the speaker, which causes less power dissipated at high output power and increases efficiency in most cases.
Low Pass Filter (LPF)
For L and R separately, a Low Pass Filter (IC7238A and B) is processing L_LOW and R_LOW. The output signal of this filter is then fed to the audio amplifier (identical for right channel).
Mute (Diagram A3 for "Left High")
A mute switch (item 7302) is provided at the PWM inputs (item 7315, LM311). This switch is controlled by the AU_EN_NOT line, which is controlled via the POR signal (mute at start-up) and via the SOUND_ENABLE line from the OTC (mute during operation). This circuitry is the same for all four amplifier parts.
Page 46
EN 106 FTP1.1E9.
Protections
Short-circuit Protection (e.g. Diagram A3 for "Left High")
A protection is made against a too high temperature of transistor 7355 in case of a short-circuit of output FET 7365-1. Transistor 7340 is sensing the current through transistor 7355 via R3355, and activates the DC-protection line (see below) in case the current becomes too high. This is the same for all four amplifier parts.
DC-protection (Diagram A7)
+9V_STBY
5753
OUT_LH
OUT_LL
3770
3771
A
3780
3781
OUT_RH
OUT_RL
Figure 9-10 DC Protection
Because of the symmetrical supply, a DC-blocking capacitor, between the amplifier and the speaker, is not necessary. However, it is still necessary to protect the speaker for DC voltages. The following protections are therefore implemented:
Via R3765 and R3775, each stabilised supply voltage line (via items 7735 and 7745) is checked on deviations.
Via R3770/3771/3780/3781, each amplifier output is checked for DC-voltage.
Via R3765/3775, a virtual earth is imposed on point A. When one of the supply voltages deviates, a DC voltage will occur on this point. If point A is positive, T7751 will conduct. If it is negative, T7761 will conduct. Both cases will make T7735 conduct, so that the DC-PROT signal will be made high. This ensures that the power supply is rapidly trimmed back. Capacitor C2760 will ensure that only DC-signals at point A will activate the protection.
2760
VCC_10_POS
3775
3765
VCC_10_NEG
3750
3760
2753
7751 7761
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
3752
3751
7735
3754
DC_PROT
7755
CL16532099_001.eps
200801
Page 47
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

9.7 Synchronisation

9.7.1 Introduction

Through the chassis, the synchronisation is complicated because the PDP display needs another number of pixel per line (852) and lines per frame (480). Therefore, there is a different sync flow for 1fH, 2fH, or 3fH inputs.
EN 107FTP1.1E 9.
Sync and Clock Flow
H-SYNC-VGA (DVI) V-SYNC-VGA (DVI)
RGB
CLK32P
Picnic
Href_ext
SH95
Matrix
FM
Y Pb Pr
HA50
VA50
EPROM
VA
YUV
YUV
FM
TDA8601
Video
SW
Falconic
FM
AD9883A
A/D
SOG (Y)
H-2FH-AD-OUT V-2FH-AD-OUT
SYNCDET
CLK-2FH
FM
(lower lines)
FM
(upper line s)
jmp
HREF
jmp
VREF
clock
Eagle
C L
32 MC
H/V
SYNC
XTAL
jmp
REFCLK
L
K
3
2
I
C
HREF_EXT
VA
VREF HREF
CLK64
HD_E
VD_E
EPLD
EBILD
Standard
Detection
CLKp
Clock switch
Sync control
UV demux
Contrast saturation brighness
R0..7 G0..7 B0..7
HS- VS- CLK- DE-OUT
DS90C385
LVDS Transmitter
LVDS
Connector
PDP
H,V shift
H
V
YUV
to
RGB
Contrast Reserve
VD-OTC
HD3-OTC
CL 36532075_048.eps
1/3
OSD
insertion
A/D
RGBBL-OSD
OTC
101103
CLK-VID
CLKp
CLK-OSD

9.7.2 Sync Flow 1fH Inputs

1fH Sync Signals
At the 1fH side, the HIP is detecting the incoming video signal and provides a H_A / V_A (Horizontal / Vertical Acquisition sync) pulse. This is the sync input for the FBX.
The flywheel of the PICNIC gives a 1fH sync H_REF_EXT to the EBILD, together with the V_A pulse.
These are switched in the EBILD and sent to Eagle (H_REF and V_REF).
The Eagle delivers new sync pulses HD_E and VD_E converted to the new line and frame sequence of the PDP 3fH. The PDP displays in 50 or 60 Hz, 480 lines per field and 852 samples per line.
The EBILD delivers sync pulses to the OTC for OSD and TXT (VD-OTC and HD3-OTC). Note that the OSD has a field freq of 50/60Hz.
1fH Clock Signals
The PICNIC delivers a 32 MHz clock (CLK32P) to the EBILD synchronised with H pulses.
The EBILD switches this signals to the Eagle (CLK32I).
The Eagle delivers a clock signal for the FALCONIC and
the field memories.
The Eagle delivers a 64 MHz clock to the EBILD (CLK64).
Figure 9-11 Sync and clock flow

9.7.3 Sync Flow 2fH Inputs

2fH Sync Signals
The input signals do not come via the HIP and PICNIC, but via the AD9883A. This AD converter delivers H and V sync signals to the EBILD (H-2FH-AD-OUT and V-2FH-AD­OUT).
These inputs are used for standard detection and H and V shift.
The EBILD divides the pulses by two, and switches the H and V syncs to the Eagle (H_ref and V_ref).
The Eagle delivers new sync pulses HD_E and VD_E converted to the new line and frame sequence of the PDP 3fH. The PDP displays in 50 or 60 Hz, 480 lines per field and 852 samples per line.
The EBILD delivers sync pulses to the OTC for OSD and TXT (VD_OTC and HD3_OTC). Note that the OSD has a field freq of 50/60Hz.
The PICNIC receives V_ref pulses as reference; it is free running for horizontal sync.
2fH Clock Signals
The AD9883A gives his sample clock (CLK-2FH) to the EBILD, this clock is synchronised with the incoming H pulses.
The EBILD switches this pulse to the Eagle (CLK32I).
Page 48
EN 108 FTP1.1E9.
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
The Eagle delivers a clock signal for the FALCONIC and the field memories.
The Eagle delivers a 64MHz clock to the EBILD (CLK64).

9.7.4 Sync Flow 3fH input sync signals

3fH Sync Signals
The input signals do not come via the HIP and PICNIC but via the AD9883A. This AD converter delivers H and V sync signals to the EBILD (H-2FH-AD-OUT and V-2FH-AD­OUT).
The sync signals are the same as with 2fH inputs.
3fH Clock Signals
The master clock is delivered by the AD9883, same as 2fH inputs; The EBILD uses this clock as sample clock for video control.

9.8 Control

CVBS TXT
RESET
H / V
SDM Service Default (active Low)
P50 IN from pin 10 Scart 2
Protection sensing +8V (err 5)
Protection sensing +5V (err 4)
Front Detect (Headphone Detection)
SAM Service Mode (active Low)
Audio protect
POR Flash
RC5/RC6 IR receiver
Keyboard
Status SCART4
Status SC3 pin 8
Light sensor

9.8.1 "Switch On" Behaviour

See paragraph "Power States" in this chapter.

9.8.2 OTC Flash

See paragraph "Software Upgrading" in this chapter.

9.8.3 Keyboard

The local keyboard is connected to P2-4 (pin 107) of the OTC, which is an A/D pin. Each key matches with a range of values within the A/D converter.

9.8.4 LED Control

In USA the same LED configuration is used as in Europe, the 2 colour LED.
5
77,78,79,80
74
83,8 96
97
98
99
100
105
106
107
108
109
110
114
119
OTC
SAA 5801
81
93
94
95
103
104
113
115
116
117
118
120

Figure 9-12 OTC interfacing

RGB Blending
Frame
HD@HOME to HOP (active H)
Reset -Audio to MSP
Sound Enable active Low (H= Mute)
PWM backlights
STANDBY H= ST-BY
ON-OFF LED L = Red LED ON
Degaussing = Active Low
SEL-IN-1
SEL-IN2
Program-FPGA
P50 Out to pin 10 SCART2
Audio I/O Selector MSB
Audio I/O Selector LSB
CL 36532053_075.eps
180703
Table 9-7 LED control
Condition Two colour LED
On Green Off No indication Low power standby No indication Standby Red Semi-standby Orange (red and green) Reaction on RC in On-state Orange (green and (red blinking)) Reaction on RC in Standby Red Reaction on RC in Semi-standby Orange (green and (red blinking)) Protection Red blinking

9.9 Protections

9.9.1 General

Under certain fault conditions, as described below, the set must go into the "protection state". This means that the set is switched into standby and displays a blinking LED. These protections are introduced in order to avoid unacceptable temperature rises and burning hazards. The failure cause will be identified and put into the NVM error buffer. For the customer, it is made impossible to switch "on" the set with his remote control. On the other hand, it must be possible to read out the error codes from NVM while using a Dealer Service Tool or a ComPair tool, or to de-activate the protection states in Service Default Mode. It is possible to enter ComPair from protection but not from standby. The protection algorithms are activated/de-activated at a certain stage in the "start-up/switch-off" sequence of the set (see also figure "Step wise start-up diagram" in chapter "Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding").

9.9.2 Hardware protections

See also the chapter Service Modes, Error Codes and Fault Finding of this manual.
Protections with detection via I/O lines of the OTC
8V protection
The +8V information is an ADC input of the microprocessor. This input can sense the absence of the +8V. The failure is filtered by software and put in the error buffer for serviceability. The set must go into protection.
5V protection
The microprocessor can sense the absence of the +5V. The failure must be filtered by software and put in the error buffer for serviceability. The set must go into protection. Because of the architectural set-up of the power supply (the +5V supply is linked to the +5V2 standby supply of the OTC), it is not possible to detect a complete absence of the +5V and to signal it in software. Therefore, no software error indication will be available when there is a complete short circuit of the +5V supply. What happens is this:
When the +5V_SW is overloaded (short circuit), this will also overload the +5V2. The supply that feeds the OTC, the standby supply, hiccups. As a result, the +5V2 is not overloaded anymore and can rise again. Because of the dip in the OTC supply voltage, the OTC will get a reset and restarts the set. If the fault cause is still present at that start­up, the system will restart all over and the set will be in a hiccup mode. This is not a problem if the duty cycle is low enough.
If however, the short circuit on the +5V is such that the +5V2 supply is not overloaded and the remaining voltage on the +5V2 is still high enough to keep the OTC alive, the short circuit on the +5V can be detected via the ADC input
Page 49
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
EN 109FTP1.1E 9.
of the OTC the same way the +8V protection is implemented. The set must also go into protection.
If a +8V or a +5V dropout is detected, the protection input should be checked several times, every 200ms. If the protection input is active for five consecutive times, the set must go into protection.
DC protection (from audio amplifier)
Because of the symmetrical supply of the audio amplifier, a DC-blocking capacitor between the amplifier and the speaker is not necessary. However, it is still necessary to protect the speaker for DC voltages. If a DC protection is activated, the OTC will set the TV in protection. A specific error code is not generated. For a detailed description, see paragraph "Audio Amplifier".
Protections with detection via I2C bus
Tuner protection
The tuner is supplied by the +5V_SW, which is delivered by the standby supply. When this supply is short-circuited, the standby supply will hiccup. If the tuner does not acknowledge on its I2C address for five consecutive times, the set goes into protection and error "13" is generated. Maximum time allowed before protection: 1.5 s.

9.10 PDP Panel

9.10.1 Introduction

The PDP, which is used in this chassis, is a product of SDI (Samsung Display Industry). When defect, a new panel must be ordered, and after receipt, the defective panel must be send for repair in the packing (flight case) of the new ordered panel.
– Feasible up to VGA/NTSC resolution (limited to 250
Mb/s).
LVDSFive low voltage (350 mV) differential pairs: one clock
pair and four data pairs.
Five grounds.EMI/EMC friendly.WXGA and HD-1280x720p (up to 1 Gb/s).
LVDS offers superior performance compared to the standard single ended signal (TTL). It is even "protocol independent" so it requires no software.
- Lower Voltage Swing (only 350 mV vs. 3 V)
- Allows faster Clocking
- Standard open Ended: 250Mbps
- LVDS: >1 Gbps
Standard Single Ended Single Signal & Larger
10 10
- Differential Signals (Two Signals) ...Low Noise!
- Receiver reads a 1 or 0 based on the delta of the two signals.
- Noise Impacts both lines and cancels out each others.
Low Voltage Differential Signalling
10 1 0
Two Signals & Smaller Voltage Swing
Noise
Voltage swing
CL 36532053_073.eps
310703
Figure 9-13 LVDS technology

9.10.2 Operation

Plasma displays work by applying a voltage between two transparent display electrodes on the front glass plate of the display. The electrodes are separated by an MgO dielectric layer and surrounded by a mixture of neon and xenon gases. When the voltage reaches the 'firing level', a plasma discharge occurs on the surface of the dielectric, resulting in the emission of ultra violet light. This UV light then excites the phosphor material at the back of the cell and emits visible light. Each cell or sub-pixel has red, blue or green phosphor material and three sub-pixels combine to make up a pixel. The intensity of each colour is controlled by varying the number and width of voltage pulses applied to the sub-pixel during a picture frame. This is implemented by dividing each picture frame into sub-frames. (For 50 Hz-mode there are 12 sub frames, for the 60 Hz-mode there are 10 sub frames). During a sub-frame, all cells are first addressed ­those to be lit are pre-charged to a specific address voltage ­then during the display time the display voltage is applied to the entire screen lighting those that were addressed. Each sub-frame has a weighting-factor. (Time-entity depends on size and number of pixels on the screen). This is a purely digital PWM control mechanism, which is a key advantage as it eliminates any unnecessary digital to analogue conversions.

9.10.3 LVDS Interface

Standard single ended signal (TTL). This requires 28 signal lines and more than 14
grounds.
Single ended signals up to 3 V.Wide flat ribbon cable.EMI/EMC problems.

9.11 Software Upgrading

9.11.1 Introduction

In this chassis, you can upgrade the software via ComPair. This offers the possibility, to replace the entire SW image without having to remove the flash-memory from its socket. You can find more information on how this procedure works in the ComPair file. It is possible that not all sets are equipped with the hardware, needed to make software upgrading possible. To speed up the programming process, the firmware of the ComPair interface can be upgraded. See Chapter "Service Modes ...", paragraph "ComPair" - "How To Order" for the order number.

9.11.2 Specifications

Some specifications are:
The upgrade feature makes use of I2C to transfer a new SW image (4 MB).
It requires the ComPair interface Box (RS232 to I2C).
The I2C bus is available at the rear side of the set.
It uses a ZIP-compressed BIN image to speed up the
transfer process (1/2 size).
The complete procedure takes less than 20 minutes with an upgraded ComPair interface:
About 90 seconds to erase a 4 MB flash-memory.Less than 10 minutes to transfer the file (max 1.9 MB).About 5 minutes to decompress/program the flash-
memory.
Note: It takes about 85 minutes with a standard interface. Constraints:
Needs the EPG flash memory, so this device must be placed also for non-EPG regions like AP and USA.
Page 50
EN 110 FTP1.1E9.
Advantages:
Flexibility.
No change in internal ROM (IROM) required (IROM not
used).
Flexibility to change of code flash manufacturer as the "flash driver" is part of the bootstrap code (part of the main software image).

9.11.3 Concept

Data Memory Space
XRAM (2MB)
0x800000
Code Memory Space
Bootstrap
SW image (32k)
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
Data Memory Space
XRAM (2MB)
0x800000
XROM-FLASH (4MB)
Exchange
0x400000
0x3F8000
Code Memory Space
EPG FLASH (512k)
Copy
EPG
0x400000
0x000000
EPG FLASH (512k)
Lower 32k of EPG flash
OTC DRAM and SRAM
Bootstrap SW
XROM-FLASH (4MB)
CL 36532008_117.eps
Figure 9-14 Memory diagram (initial situation)
The architecture of the OTC microprocessor does not allow the execution of code from the external RAM. It is also impossible to write data in the code memory space (there is no instruction to write data to those memory locations). The OTC normally boots from its internal ROM (IROM) but modification of the internal ROM software would be too expensive. Fortunately, the chip architecture allows also the booting from external ROM (XROM). The IROM is mapped on the first 32 kB of the ROM address space. The XROM is mapped starting at the same address. Therefore, the lower 32 kB of XROM overlaps the IROM memory space. Via an external pin (EA), it is possible to reveal the XROM memory below the IROM and so boot using this hidden software. This is the first trick used by the software upgrade procedure.
To be able to write to the CODE flash, it is required to address the device via the RAM address space. Today all RAM but also the EPG flash is mapped on the RAM address space. Devices are mapped to the right address space via a few control lines (kind of chip select). By exchanging the control lines between the EPG and the CODE flash, it is possible to map the CODE flash in the RAM address space and at the same time use the EPG flash to execute software. This is the second trick used by the procedure.
The main idea is to use the EPG flash to boot up the software upgrade procedure. Therefore, the complete procedure relies on the presence of that one.
0x000000
130503
OTC DRAM and SRAM
0x000000 0x000000
Lower 32k of EPG flash
(bootstrap)
CL 36532008_118.eps
130503
Figure 9-15 Memory diagram (after bus exchange)
In order to be able to write new software code to the set, we therefore must copy the bootstrap code to a free memory area (e.g. the EPG flash-memory) in order to be able to execute "externally" the upgrade procedure code. Solution: swap the software code to the data memory space (via setting jumper/switch 1402) and boot from the EPG FLASH. After the zip-file uploading and (internally) software unpacking, the old situation must be restored.
7006
SWITCH
7001
7018/7019
ARTISTIC
(OTC)
ROM
CONTROL
I ROM
JUMPER
EA
1402
FLASH-RAM
CL 36532008_116.eps
4MB
ROM/
060503
7007
2MB
TXT
DRAM
7012
0.5MB
EPG
FLASHRAM
RAM
CONTROL
2
C
I
Figure 9-16 Software upgrade set-up
A jumper/switch on the SSP will swap the devices and boot "externally" via the EPG flash. Then, via ComPair, the download command is given. The new (ZIP) image will be first downloaded to the OTCs external RAM (TXT DRAM). Then a checksum on the ZIP image will be computed on both sides (PC and TV) and compared. If everything is correct, the CODE flash will be erased and the new image will be transferred and unzipped (= decompressed) into the flash. This is done via the bootstrap code. A second checksum will be computed on the decompressed image. After the upgrade, the EPG flash will be cleared again.
Page 51
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

9.12 Abbreviation list

EN 111FTP1.1E 9.
START
Clear EPG flash
Load bootstrap into EPG flash
Is bootstrap
loaded
Yes
Switch of the set,
jumper setting change
Switch on the set, connect to PC
2
via ComPair I
C and start the upgrade
Is download
successful
Yes
Restart the set
and clear EPG flash
END
Figure 9-17 Software upgrade flow chart
No
Switch off the set
No
CL 36532008_135.eps
130503
0/6/12 SCART switch control signal on A/V
board. 0 = loop through (AUX to TV), 6 = play 16:9 format, 12 = play 4:3
format 2DNR Spatial (2D) Noise Reduction 3DNR Temporal (3D) Noise Reduction AARA Automatic Aspect Ratio Adaptation:
algorithm that adapts aspect ratio to
remove horizontal black bars; keeps
the original aspect ratio ACI Automatic Channel Installation:
algorithm that installs TV channels
directly from a cable network by
means of a predefined TXT page ADC Analogue to Digital Converter AFC Automatic Frequency Control: control
signal used to tune to the correct
frequency AGC Automatic Gain Control: algorithm that
controls the video input of the feature
box AM Amplitude Modulation ANR Automatic Noise Reduction: one of the
algorithms of Auto TV AP Asia Pacific AR Aspect Ratio: 4 by 3 or 16 by 9 Artistic See OTC 2.5: main processor ASF Auto Screen Fit: algorithm that adapts
aspect ratio to remove horizontal black
bars without discarding video
information ATSC Advanced Television Systems
Committee ATV See Auto TV Auto TV A hardware and software control
system that measures picture content,
and adapts image parameters in a
dynamic way AV External Audio Video B/G Monochrome TV system. Sound
carrier distance is 5.5 MHz BTSC Broadcast Television Standard
Committee. Multiplex FM stereo sound
system, originating from the USA and
used e.g. in LATAM and AP-NTSC
countries B-TXT Blue TeleteXT C Centre channel (audio) CL Constant Level: audio output to
connect with an external amplifier ComPair Computer aided rePair CSM Customer Service Mode CLK_2FH Clock output AD converter CTI Colour Transient Improvement:
manipulates steepness of chroma
transients CVBS Composite Video Blanking and
Synchronization DAC Digital to Analogue Converter DBE Dynamic Bass Enhancement: extra
low frequency amplification DDC See "E-DDC" D/K Monochrome TV system. Sound
carrier distance is 6.5 MHz DFU Directions For Use: owner's manual DNR Digital Noise Reduction: noise
reduction feature of the set DRAM Dynamic RAM DSP Digital Signal Processing DST Dealer Service Tool: special remote
control designed for service
technicians
Page 52
EN 112 FTP1.1E9.
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
DVD Digital Versatile Disc DVI(-d) Digital Visual Interface (d= digital only) Eagle Feature box IC performing peaking,
zooming and subpixel LTI in both horizontal and vertical directions, CTI, and other colour features
EBILD Eagle Based Intelligent LCD Driver
(Programmed EPLD)
E-DDC Enhanced Display Data Channel
(VESA standard for communication channel and display). Using E-DDC, the video source can read the EDID information form the display.
EDID Extended Display Identification Data
(VESA standard)
EEPROM Electrically Erasable and
Programmable Read Only Memory EMI Electro Magnetic Interference EPLD Erasable Programmable Logic Device EU Europe EXT EXTernal (source), entering the set by
SCART or by cinches (jacks) FALCONIC SAA4992H, feature box IC which
performs Digital Natural Motion, 3DNR
vertical zoom, and vertical peaking FBL Fast BLanking: DC signal
accompanying RGB signals FBX Feature BoX: part of the small signal
board /separate module which
contains 100 Hz processing, extra
features and AutoTV algorithms
(FBX6= based on PICNIC, FBX7=
based on PICNIC and Eagle) FDS Full Dual Screen (same as FDW) FDW Full Dual Window (same as FDS) FLASH FLASH memory FM Field Memory or Frequency
Modulation FTV Flat TeleVision Gb/s Giga bits per second G-TXT Green TeleteXT H H_sync to the module H_2FH_AD_OUT H-sync output from AD converter HDI High Definition Interface H-DVI H_sync from DVI to RGB converter
chip HIP High-end video Input Processor
(TDA9320): video and chroma
decoder. HOP High-end video Output Processor
(TDA9330): video, sync, and
geometry controller HP HeadPhone H_DVI H-sync from DVI-to-RGB converter
chip H_SYNC_VGA H-sync on VGA connector I Monochrome TV system. Sound
carrier distance is 6.0 MHz I2C Integrated IC bus I2S Integrated IC Sound bus IF Intermediate Frequency Interlaced Scan mode where two fields are used
to form one frame. Each field contains
half the number of the total amount of
lines. The fields are written in "pairs",
causing line flicker. IR Infra Red IRQ Interrupt Request ITV Institutional TeleVision, TV sets for
hotels, hospitals etc. Last Status The settings last chosen by the
customer and read and stored in RAM
or in the NVM. They are called at start-
up of the set to configure it according
to the customer's preferences
LATAM Latin America LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode L/L' Monochrome TV system. Sound
carrier distance is 6.5 MHz. L' is Band
I, L is all bands except for Band I LS Loudspeaker LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signalling Mbps Mega bits per second M/N Monochrome TV system. Sound
carrier distance is 4.5 MHz MOSFET Metal Oxide Silicon Field Effect
Transistor, switching device MPEG Motion Pictures Experts Group MSP Multi-standard Sound Processor: ITT
sound decoder MUTE MUTE Line NC Not Connected NICAM Near Instantaneous Compounded
Audio Multiplexing. This is a digital
sound system, mainly used in Europe. NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient,
non-linear resistor NTSC National Television Standard
Committee. Colour system mainly
used in North America and Japan.
Colour carrier NTSC M/N= 3.579545
MHz, NTSC 4.43= 4.433619 MHz (this
is a VCR norm, it is not transmitted off-
air) NVM Non-Volatile Memory: IC containing
TV related data such as alignments O/C Open Circuit OSD On Screen Display OTC On screen display Teletext and
Control; also called Artistic (SAA5800) OTP One Time Programmable P50 Project 50: communication protocol
between TV and peripherals PAL Phase Alternating Line. Colour system
mainly used in West Europe (colour
carrier= 4.433619 MHz) and South
America (colour carrier PAL M=
3.575612 MHz and PAL N= 3.582056
MHz) PCB Printed Circuit Board (same as
"PWB") PCM Pulse Code Modulation PDP Plasma Display Panel PFC Power Factor Corrector (or Pre-
conditioner) PICNIC Peripheral Integrated Combined
Network IC (SAA4978): main IC for
100 Hz features and feature
processing PIP Picture In Picture PLL Phase Locked Loop. Used for e.g.
FST tuning systems. The customer
can give directly the desired frequency POR Power On Reset, signal to reset the P Progressive Scan Scan mode where all scan lines are
displayed in one frame at the same
time, creating a double vertical
resolution. PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient,
non-linear resistor PWB Printed Wiring Board (same as "PCB") PWM Pulse Width Modulation RAM Random Access Memory RGB Red, Green, and Blue. The primary
colour signals for TV. By mixing levels
of R, G, and B, all colours (Y/C) are
reproduced. RGB_DVI RGB video input on DVI converter chip RGB_VGA RGB video input on VGA connector
Page 53
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
EN 113FTP1.1E 9.
RC Remote Control RC5 / RC6 Signal protocol from the remote
control receiver RESET RESET signal ROM Read Only Memory R-TXT Red TeleteXT SAM Service Alignment Mode S/C Short Circuit SCART Syndicat des Constructeurs
d'Appareils Radiorecepteurs et
Televisieurs SCL Serial Clock I2C SCL-F CLock Signal on Fast I2C bus SD Standard Definition SDA Serial Data I2C SDA-F DAta Signal on Fast I2C bus SDRAM Synchronous DRAM SECAM SEequence Couleur Avec Memoire.
Colour system mainly used in France
and East Europe. Colour carriers=
4.406250 MHz and 4.250000 MHz SIF Sound Intermediate Frequency SMPS Switched Mode Power Supply SOG Sync On Green SOPS Self Oscillating Power Supply S/PDIF Sony Philips Digital InterFace SRAM Static RAM SSB Small Signal Board SSP Small Signal Panel STBY STandBY SUB_Y/U/V_2FH Y/U/V input from I/O cel SOGIN Sync-On-Green input AD converter SOGOUT Sync-On-Green output AD converter SVGA 800x600 (4:3) SVHS Super Video Home System SW Software SXGA 1280x1024 SYNCDET SOGOUT from AD converter TFT Thin Film Transistor THD Total Harmonic Distortion TXT TeleteXT TXT-DW Dual Window with TeleteXT uP Microprocessor U_2FH_0..7 U digital output AD converter port 0 to
7 (7= MSB) UXGA 1600x1200 (4:3) V V-sync to the module V_2FH_0..7 V digital output AD converter port 0 to
7 (7= MSB) V_2FH_AD_OUT V-sync output from AD converter VCR Video Cassette Recorder V_DVI V-sync from DVI-to-RGB converter
chip VESA Video Electronics Standards
Association VGA 640x480 (4:3) VL Variable Level out: processed audio
output toward external amplifier V_SYNC_VGA V-sync on VGA connector WYSIWYR What You See Is What You Record:
record selection that follows main
picture and sound WXGA 1280x768 (15:9) XTAL Quartz crystal XGA 1024x768 (4:3) XVGA 1024x768 (4:3) Y Luminance signal Y_2FH_0..7 Y digital output AD converter port 0 to
7 (7= MSB) Y/C Luminance (Y) and Chrominance (C)
signal YPbPr Component video. Luminance and
scaled colour difference signals (B-Y
and R-Y) YUV Component video
YUV_2FH YUV video input AD converter YUV_VGA YUV output from matrix (RGB to YUV)
Page 54
EN 114 FTP1.1E9.

9.13 IC Data Sheets

This section shows the internal block diagrams and pin layouts of ICs that are drawn as "black boxes" in the electrical diagrams (with the exception of "memory" and "logic" ICs).

9.13.1 Diagram B3C, T8F24EF (IC7724)

0& ( /&
8u@32MHz - 8 bits unsigned data at 32 MHz m8s@32MHz-multiplexed UV 8 bits signed data at 32 MHz nu - n bits unsigned data at 64 MHz (if 10u for Y
black on 32+256 = 288, white on 256+511 767) ns - n bits signed data at 64 MHz mns -multiplexed UV n bits signed data at 64 MHz rns - repeated UV n bits signed data at 64 MHz
  
  #
& "
 !(
!(
   
)!
&)
( !(
!'
& '
  
  #
Input
*+,-
Mux
!"



)!(
ReNrlnReNrln
Control
Input
Mux
/*&+,-
Unit
.
* .
Y
undither
repeat
SkipNextRstrSkipNextRstr
Y sync
Gfx sync
UV sync
repeat
/*&
UV
invert
Y-scaler
Vertical
UV
undither
/.&
Vertical
L
τ
16
...
L
τ
04
L
τ
03
L
τ
02
L
τ
01
/.&
UV-scaler
y_-07
y_+05
y_+06
y_+07
y_+08
y_+09
CTI
&
&
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
y_-07
Vertical
...
y_+09
...
y_-04
Vertical
Peaking
...
y_+04
Horizontal
y_+00
Peaking
y_+00
Colour
Features
& & & & &
&
&
LTI
CDS
&
*&

Σ
&


$%
&
&
.
Horizontal
UV-scaler
Y-scaler
Horizontal
delay
compens.
LTI
LUT's
&
Horizontal
&
&
LTI
Graphics Insertion
123
SNERT
interface
decoder
UV
invert
1

14
323
34
3,
BST
controls

YUV_formatter
.*/& &/*& *&
Tripple 10bit DAC @ 64MHz
345
36





 
 
VDDC 157
VSS 158
VDDA 159
VSS 160
Y9 161 Y8 162 Y7 163
VDDC 164
VSS165
Y6 166 Y5 167 Y4 168 Y3 169 Y2 170 Y1 171 Y0 172
VDDA 173
VSS 174 UVG0 175 UVG1 176 UVG2 177 UVG3 178 UVG4 179 VDDC 180
VSS 181 UVG5 182 UVG6 183 UVG7 184
YG0 185
YG1 186
YG2 187
YG3 188
YG4 189
YG5 190
YG6 191
YG7 192 VDDA 193
VSS 194
CLK32O195
VSS 196 VDDC 197
VSS 198
RSTW_YUV199
WEYUV_F200
RSTRUV 201
REUV 202
RSTRY 203
REY 204
FALREF 205
REFIN 206
WEYUV_G 207
VDDA 208
156 VSS
VDDC 1
155 VSSA
VSS 2
154
153
152
151
150 VDDCA
149 VDDC
148 VSS
147 IS1
146 IS0
145
144
143 RESET
142 VSS
141 VDDA
140
CLK64SEL
139 CLK64I
138 VSS
137
CLK64O
136 VSS
135 VDDA
134 VSS
133 VDDC
132 U0
131 U1
130 U2
129 U3
128 U4
127 U5
126 U6
125 U7
124 U8
123 U9
122 VSS
121 VDDA
120 V0
119 V1
118 VSS
117 VDDC
116 V2
115 V3
114 V4
113 V5
112 V6
111 V7
110 V8
109 V9
108 VSS
107 VDDC
106 VSS
105 VDDA
104 TESTSEL2 103 TESTSEL1 102 TESTSEL0 101 CLK32I 100 VDDA 99 98 97 VSS 96 VSS 95 VDDC 94 VDDC 93 92 91 90 VDDC 89 VDDC 88 VSS 87 VSS 86 85 84 PDN 83 VDDC


VD29
HD28
YF0 14
YF1 15
YF2 16
YF3 17
YF4 18
YF5 19
YF6 20
UVF5 9
UVF0 4
UVF1 5
UVF2 6
UVF3 7
UVF4 8
VDDA 3
VSS 12
UVF6 10
UVF7 11
VDDC13
YF7 21
VSS 22
VSS 25
VDDC 23
VDDA 24
VA 31
SNCK 26
SNDA 32
INTR1 30
SNRST 27
VSS 38
VSS 39
TMS 35
TRST 34
HREF 33
VDDC 36
VDDC 37
VDDA 40
TDI 42
VSS 41
45464748495051
TCK 44
TDO 43
82 VDDC 81 VSS 80 VSS 79 78 VDDBA 77 FSADJV 76 VBSV 75 VREFV 74 AOUTPV 73 AOUTNV 72 VSSA 71 70 69 68 VDDBA 67 FSADJU 66 VBSU 65 VREFU 64 AOUTPU 63 AOUTNU 62 VSSA 61 VSS 60 VDDB 59 VDDBA 58 FSADJY 57 VBSY 56 VREFY 55 AOUTPY 54 AOUTNY 53 VSSA
52
CL 16532149_110.eps
310703
Figure 9-18 Internal Block Diagram and Pin Configuration
Page 55
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

9.13.2 Diagram B14A, TEA6415 (IC7I24)

EN 115FTP1.1E 9.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
CVBS
(MAC/DEC )
CVBS
(PERI PLUG1 )
CVBS
(AM TUNER )
MAC SIGNAL
(AM TUNER )
CVBS
(PERI PLUG2 )
CVBS
(FM TUNER )
MAC SIGNAL
(FM TUNER )
SYNCHRO
(TTX/BTX )
PERI
PERI
TV2
TTX LUMA
CHROM A
POWE R
TV1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12
1
3
5
6
8
10
11
20
PIP MAC
DEC.
GND
BUS
DECODER
27
DATA GN DCLOC K V
PROG
4
9
CC
19
Figure 9-19 Internal Block Diagram and Pin Configuration
T E
A
6 4 1 5
C
CL 36532008_144.eps
211003
6415C-02.EPS
Page 56
EN 116 FTP1.1E9.

9.13.3 Diagram B16DE, MC1496D (IC7H40, 7H50, 7H60)

Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets
EQUIVALENT SCHEMATIC
CARRIER (±)
INPUT (+)
SIGNAL (±)
INPUT (+)
BIAS
10
4
8
1
5
14
VO (+) VO (-)
6
Q
Q
D
1
R
1
500k 500k 500k
2
1
Q
5
Q
7
R
1
Q
3
Q
Q
12
Q
4
6
2
GAIN ADJUST
3
8
R
1
PIN CONFIGURATION
F, N Packages
POSITIVE
SIGNAL INPUT
GAIN ADJUST
GAIN ADJUST
NEGATIVE
SIGNAL INPUT
POSITIVE
OUTPUT
Figure 9-20 Internal Block Diagram and Pin Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
BIAS
6
78
NC
14
V
CC
13
NC NEGATIVE
12
OUTPUT
11
NC NEGATIVE
10
CARRIER INPUT
9
NC POSITIVE
CARRIER INPUT
CL 36532053_082.eps
170703
Page 57
Circuit Descriptions, Abbreviation List, and IC Data Sheets

9.13.4 Diagram B19E, AD9066JR (IC7E09, 7E16)

FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
VT
AD9066
+V
EN 117FTP1.1E 9.
S
INA
REF A
ENCODE
INB
REF B
VB
PIN CONFIGURATIONS
+V
1
2
S
3
4
28
27
26
25
D4A
ENCODE D5A (MSB)
GND D3A GND D2A
6-BIT
DAC
6-BIT
DAC
+V
VT
REF A
INB
D0A-D5A
D0B-D5B
1
S
2
3
4
28
27
26
25
GND INA +V
S
GND
5
+V
S
INA D0A (LSB)
GND GND
+V
S
VT D5B (MSB)
REF A D4B
INB D3B
REF B D2B
VB D1B
NC D0B (LSB)
AD9066
6
(JR/AR)
7
TOP VIEW
(Not to Scale)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
D1A
+V
S
NC = NO CONNECT
Figure 9-21 Internal Block Diagram and Pin Layout
REF B
VB
NC
(LSB) D0B
D1B D2B
D3B D4B
(MSB) D5B
+V
5
AD9066
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
S
(ARS)
TOP VIEW
(Not to Scale)
NC = NO CONNECT
CL 36532053_083.eps
24
GND +V
23
22
ENCODE
21
D5A (MSB)
20
D4A
19
D3A
18
D2A
17
D1A
16
D0A (LSB)
15
GND
S
220703
Page 58
EN 118 FTP1.1E10.

10. Spare Parts List

Spare Parts List
Set Level
Various
0095 3122 128 14951 Wall mount assy 0098 3122 128 13921 Mounting kit assy 8301 3122 358 76281 Tree assy CN1-S01 8302
h 3104 311 05171 Cable 9p/860/9p h 3104 311 03611 Cable 12p/280/12p
8303 8304
h 3122 358 76291 Tree assy A04-LS right h 3104 311 06201 Cable 8p/480/8p
8305 8306
h 3104 311 06691 Cable 10P/340/10P
8307
h 3104 311 06701 Cable 10P/480/10P h 3104 311 06521 Cable 13P/340/13P
8308 8309
h 3104 311 00351 Cable 3p/400/3p kr h 8204 000 76372 Cable TW.p 13/280/DF19
8311
h 3104 311 06331 Cable 3P/1700/3P kr
8345
h 3104 311 05161 Cable 8p/600/8p
8388
Audio Amplifier [A]
Various
0302 2422 025 16846 Connector 9p m h 0303 2422 025 16702 Connector 5p m h 0304 2422 025 16543 Connector 4p m 0388 2422 025 16704 Connector 8p m 1730 4822 071 52502 Fuse 2.5A 1740 4822 071 52502 Fuse 2.5A
g
2201 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2202 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2204 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2205 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2206 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2207 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2212 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2215 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2216 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2218 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2220 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2221 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2222 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2224 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2225 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2233 2020 552 96325 25V 68nF 10% 2234 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2238 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2239 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2243 2020 552 96325 25V 68nF 10% 2244 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2255 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2256 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2260 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2261 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2270 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2271 4822 126 14494 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2309 4822 126 14247 1.5nF 50V 0603 2310 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2315 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2316 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2318 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2319 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2330 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2334 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2335 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2340 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2355 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2359 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2360 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2365 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2366 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2409 4822 126 14247 1.5nF 50V 0603 2410 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2415 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2416 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2418 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2419 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2430 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2434 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2435 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2440 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2455 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2459 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603
2460 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2465 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2466 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2509 4822 126 14247 1.5nF 50V 0603 2510 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2515 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2516 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2518 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2519 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2530 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2534 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2535 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2540 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2555 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2559 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2560 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2565 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2566 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2609 4822 126 14247 1.5nF 50V 0603 2610 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2615 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2616 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2618 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2619 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2630 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2634 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2635 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2640 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2655 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2659 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2660 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2665 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2666 2020 552 96326 220nF 10% 16V 2730 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2732 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2734 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2740 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2742 2020 012 93764 220µF 20% 35V 2744 4822 124 12084 1µF 20% 50V 2752 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2753 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2759 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2760 5322 124 41945 22µF 20% 35V 2770 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2771 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2780 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2781 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2799 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603
f
3201 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3202 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3203 4822 051 30272 2.7k 5% 0.062W 3205 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3206 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3207 4822 051 30272 2.7k 5% 0.062W 3210 4822 051 30333 33k 5% 0.062W 3211 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3215 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3216 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3217 4822 051 30272 2.7k 5% 0.062W 3220 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3221 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3222 4822 051 30272 2.7k 5% 0.062W 3230 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3231 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3232 4822 051 30152 1.5k 5% 0.062W 3233 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3234 4822 051 30561 560 5% 0.062W 3240 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3241 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3242 4822 051 30152 1.5k 5% 0.062W 3243 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3244 4822 051 30561 560 5% 0.062W 3255 4822 117 11817 1.2k 1% 0.062W 3256 4822 051 30332 3.3k 5% 0.062W 3257 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3259 4822 117 12917 1 5% 0.062W 0603 3270 4822 117 11817 1.2k 1% 0.062W 3271 4822 051 30332 3.3k 5% 0.062W 3272 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3274 4822 117 12917 1 5% 0.062W 0603 3301 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3302 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3303 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3304 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3306 4822 117 12902 8.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3307 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603
3308 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3309 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3310 4822 117 12864 82k 5% 0.6W 3311 4822 117 12917 1 5% 0.062W 0603 3315 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3318 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3325 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3327 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3328 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3330 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3336 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3337 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3340 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3355 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3361 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3362 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3401 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3402 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3403 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3404 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3406 4822 117 12902 8.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3407 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3408 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3409 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3410 4822 117 12864 82k 5% 0.6W 3411 4822 051 30153 15k 5% 0.062W 3415 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3418 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3425 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3427 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3428 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3430 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3436 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3437 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3440 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3455 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3461 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3462 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3501 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3502 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3503 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3504 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3506 4822 117 12902 8.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3507 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3508 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3509 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3510 4822 117 12864 82k 5% 0.6W 3511 4822 051 30682 6.8k 5% 0.062W 3515 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3518 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3525 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3527 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3528 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3530 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3536 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3537 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3540 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3555 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3561 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3562 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3601 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3602 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3603 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3604 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3606 4822 117 12902 8.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3607 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3608 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3609 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3610 4822 117 12864 82k 5% 0.6W 3611 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W 3615 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3618 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3625 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3627 4822 117 11449 2.2k 5% 0.1W 0805 3628 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3630 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3636 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3637 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3640 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3655 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3661 4822 051 30475 4.7M 5% 0.062W 0603 3662 5322 117 11726 10 5% 3732 4822 051 30272 2.7k 5% 0.062W 3733 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3742 4822 051 30272 2.7k 5% 0.062W 3743 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3749 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3750 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3751 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603
Page 59
Spare Parts List
EN 119FTP1.1E 10.
3752 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3754 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3755 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3760 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3765 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3770 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3771 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3780 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3781 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603
b
5335 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5360 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5365 2422 536 00338 33µH 10% SMD 10mm 5435 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5460 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5465 2422 536 00338 33µH 10% SMD 10mm 5535 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5560 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5565 2422 536 00338 33µH 10% SMD 10mm 5635 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5660 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5665 2422 536 00338 33µH 10% SMD 10mm 5714 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5719 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5725 4822 157 11717 Filt. BLM31P500SPT 5753 2422 549 43769 Bead 30 at 100MHz
d
6328 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6334 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6335 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6355 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6356 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6359 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6360 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6428 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6434 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6435 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6455 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6456 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6459 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6460 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6528 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6534 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6535 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6555 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6556 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6559 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6560 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6628 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6634 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6635 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6655 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6656 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6659 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6660 4822 130 11148 UDZ4.7B 6732 4822 130 11551 UDZS10B 6742 4822 130 11551 UDZS10B 6750 4822 130 10328 BAV99W 6760 4822 130 10328 BAV99W
ce
7211 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7225 4822 209 30095 LM833D 7238 4822 209 30095 LM833D 7260 4822 209 30095 LM833D 7302 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7303 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7315 9338 028 20668 LM311D 7330 4822 130 42804 BC817-25 7340 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7355 5322 130 60845 BC807-25 7365 9322 161 86668 IRF7343 7402 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7403 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7415 9338 028 20668 LM311D 7430 4822 130 42804 BC817-25 7440 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7455 5322 130 60845 BC807-25 7465 9322 161 86668 IRF7343 7502 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7503 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7515 9338 028 20668 LM311D 7530 4822 130 42804 BC817-25 7540 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7555 5322 130 60845 BC807-25 7565 9322 161 86668 IRF7343 7602 3198 010 42310 BC847BW
7603 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7615 9338 028 20668 LM311D 7630 4822 130 42804 BC817-25 7640 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7655 5322 130 60845 BC807-25 7665 9322 161 86668 IRF7343 7735 4822 130 60142 BC869 7736 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7745 5322 130 61569 BC868 7746 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7751 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7753 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7755 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7761 3198 010 42320 BC857BW
Small Signal Panel [B]
Various
0020h 3122 128 14621 Connector plate F37 EU 0072 3104 301 24451 Frame SSB A-side 0073 3104 301 24461 Cover SSB A-side 0074 3104 301 24221 Cover SSB Z-side 0075 3104 301 24201 Frame SSB Z-side 0079 3104 308 11161 Shielding cover 0080 3104 301 24471 Frame SSB Z-side 0103 3104 303 10871 EMC foam tuner 0166 3122 128 14661 Connector plate FTY37 0305 3104 304 23841 Xtal grommet 0308 3104 304 23841 Xtal grommet 1001 2422 543 89022 Xtal 6MHz 20pF CX5F
h 3122 358 76342 Mains inlet unit
1061 1305 2422 543 01184 Xtal 4.433619MHz 20pF 1308 2422 543 01183 Xtal 3.579545MHz 16pF 1403 2422 086 11092 Fuse F0.5A 50V 1206 1404 2422 127 00543 Switch 1p 2pos 1407 2422 549 44324 Filt. TPWCC04BS 1408 2422 549 44372 SAW 38.9MHz K3953L 1409 2422 549 44369 SAW 38.9MHz K9656L 1702 2422 540 98456 Resonator 12MHz 1A00 2422 543 89019 Xtal 18.432MHz 12pF 1D01 2422 025 16984 Connector 15p f 1E02 2422 025 17274 Connector 10p m 1E04 2422 025 17103 Connector 3p m 1I01 4822 267 10771 Socket 2 x SCART 1I04 4822 267 60385 Socket 1 x SCART 1I05 2422 026 05213 Socket 3p BkWhRd 1I07 2422 026 05501 Socket CINCH 6p f 1I08 4822 267 31014 Socket headphone 1I19 4822 267 10748 Connector 3p m 1T01 3139 147 19341 Tuner UV1318S/A I-3 1Y01 2422 025 17706 Connector 20p m 1Y45 2422 025 10768 Connector 3p m 1Y81 2422 025 10772 Connector 12p m 1Y82 4822 267 10636 Connector 13P 1Y88 4822 265 11352 Connector 8p
h 3104 311 03611 Cable 12p/280/12p
8303
h 3104 311 06201 Cable 8p/480/8p
8305
h 3104 311 06701 Cable 10P/480/10P
8307 8308
h 3104 311 06521 Cable 13P/340/13P
8309
h 3104 311 00351 Cable 3p/400/3p kr h 8204 000 76372 Cable TW.p 13/280/DF19
8311
g
2000 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2001 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2002 4822 126 11669 27pF 5% 50V 0603 2003 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V 2004 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V 2005 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2006 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2007 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2008 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2010 4822 126 11785 47pF 5% 50V 0603 2011 4822 126 11785 47pF 5% 50V 0603 2012 4822 126 11785 47pF 5% 50V 0603 2013 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2016 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2017 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2018 2222 867 15339 33pF 5% 50V 0603 2019 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2020 4822 126 13883 220pF 5% 50V 2022 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2023 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2024 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2025 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2026 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2027 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2028 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2029 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603
2031 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2033 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2034 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2035 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2036 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2037 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2038 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2039 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2040 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2063 3198 017 34730 47nF 16V 0603 2067 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2073 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2074 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2302 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2305 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2316 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2322 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2340 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2350 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2351 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2352 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2353 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2354 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2356 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2357 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2358 5322 126 11579 3.3nF 10% 63V 2359 4822 122 33752 15pF 5% 50V 2360 3198 016 31280 1.2pF 50V 0603 2361 3198 016 31280 1.2pF 50V 0603 2362 4822 126 11663 12pF 5% 50V 0603 2365 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2366 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2367 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2368 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2369 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2370 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2371 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2372 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2373 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2374 4822 126 14491 2.2µF -20+80% 10V 0805 2375 2238 916 15641 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2376 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2377 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2378 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2384 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2385 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2390 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2391 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2394 4822 126 14491 2.2µF -20+80% 10V 0805 2403 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2404 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2405 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2406 4822 126 13883 220pF 5% 50V 2407 4822 126 14221 68PF 5% NP0 50V 0603 2408 3198 016 33380 3.3pF 50V 0603 2409 4822 126 14491 2.2µF -20+80% 10V 0805 2410 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2411 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2412 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2414 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2415 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2417 3198 017 44740 470nF 10V 0603 2418 3198 016 35680 5.6pF 0.5pF 50V 0603 2422 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2424 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2425 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2432 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2433 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2709 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2710 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2711 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2712 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2713 4822 122 33761 22pF 5% 50V 2714 4822 122 33761 22pF 5% 50V 2715 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2716 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2718 4822 122 33752 15pF 5% 50V 2719 4822 122 33752 15pF 5% 50V 2720 4822 122 33752 15pF 5% 50V 2721 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2722 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2723 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2724 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2728 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2729 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2730 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2731 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2732 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2733 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2734 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2735 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2740 2238 916 15641 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2741 2238 916 15641 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2742 2238 916 15641 22nF 10% 25V 0603
Page 60
EN 120 FTP1.1E10.
Spare Parts List
2743 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2744 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2745 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2746 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2747 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2748 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2749 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2750 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2751 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2752 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2753 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2754 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2755 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2756 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2757 2238 916 15641 22nF 10% 25V 0603 2760 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2761 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2762 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2763 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2764 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2765 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2766 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2767 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2768 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2769 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2770 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2771 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2772 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2773 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2774 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2775 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2776 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2777 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2778 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2779 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2780 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2781 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2782 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2784 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2785 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2786 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2787 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2788 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2789 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2790 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2791 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2792 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2793 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2794 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2795 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2796 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2797 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2798 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2799 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2800 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2801 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2802 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2803 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2804 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2805 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2806 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2807 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2808 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2809 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2810 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2811 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2812 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2813 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2817 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2819 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2820 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2821 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2822 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2823 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2824 5322 126 11578 1nF 10% 50V 0603 2825 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2826 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2829 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2831 4822 126 14221 68PF 5% NP0 50V 0603 2832 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2833 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2834 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2835 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2836 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2837 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2838 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2842 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2843 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2844 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2845 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2846 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2847 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2848 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2851 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603
2852 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2853 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2854 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2855 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2857 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2858 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2859 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2860 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2861 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2862 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2863 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2864 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2865 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2866 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2867 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2870 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2871 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2872 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2874 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2877 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2880 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2881 4822 126 11669 27pF 5% 50V 0603 2884 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2886 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2887 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2888 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2889 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2890 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2891 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2892 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2893 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2894 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2895 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2896 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2897 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2898 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2899 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A00 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A01 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2A02 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A03 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2A04 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A05 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2A06 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A07 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2A08 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A10 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A11 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A13 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A14 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A15 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2A16 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A17 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A18 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2A19 3198 017 41050 1µF 10V 0603 2A21 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A22 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A23 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A26 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A27 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A29 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2A30 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2A31 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A32 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2A33 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A34 3198 035 71030 10nF 16V 0402 2A35 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A36 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2A37 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2A38 3198 035 71030 10nF 16V 0402 2A40 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A41 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2A42 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2A43 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2A44 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A46 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A47 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A48 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A49 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A50 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A51 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A52 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A54 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A57 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A60 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A65 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A67 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A68 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A71 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A73 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A77 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2A79 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2A82 3198 017 34730 47nF 16V 0603 2A91 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V
2A92 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2A95 4822 126 13883 220pF 5% 50V 2A99 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2AA0 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2AA1 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2AA5 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2AA6 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2AA7 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2AA8 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2AA9 3198 016 35680 5.6pF 0.5pF 50V 0603 2AB0 3198 016 35680 5.6pF 0.5pF 50V 0603 2AB2 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2AB3 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2AB4 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2AB5 2020 021 91554 10µF 20% 16V 2AB8 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2C00 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2C01 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2C02 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D03 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2D04 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2D09 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D10 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D11 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D12 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D16 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D17 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D22 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D50 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V 2D51 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D52 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D53 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D54 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D55 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D57 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D58 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D59 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D60 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D61 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D62 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V 2D63 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D64 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D65 3198 032 47170 47µF 20% 16V 2D66 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D67 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D68 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D69 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2D70 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D71 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D72 4822 126 11785 47pF 5% 50V 0603 2D73 4822 126 11785 47pF 5% 50V 0603 2D74 3198 032 47170 47µF 20% 16V 2D75 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D76 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2D77 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2D78 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E02 4822 124 23237 22µF 20% 6.3V 2E04 3198 035 04710 470pF 50V 0402 2E05 4822 124 23237 22µF 20% 6.3V 2E09 4822 124 23237 22µF 20% 6.3V 2E10 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E11 4822 124 23237 22µF 20% 6.3V 2E12 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E14 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E15 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E17 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E18 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E19 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E20 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E21 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E22 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2E23 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E24 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E25 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E26 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E28 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E30 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E32 4822 124 81286 47µF 20% 16V 2E34 4822 124 11946 22µF 20% 16V 2E35 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E37 4822 124 23237 22µF 20% 6.3V 2E39 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E50 4822 124 23237 22µF 20% 6.3V 2E51 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2E52 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E54 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E55 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E56 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E58 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E59 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E61 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E62 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E63 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E64 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603
Page 61
Spare Parts List
EN 121FTP1.1E 10.
2E66 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E68 2022 552 05616 4.7µF 5% 6.3V 2E69 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E70 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E71 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E72 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E73 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E74 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E75 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E76 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E78 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E79 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E80 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E83 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E84 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E86 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2E87 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2I00 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2I07 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 2I09 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I10 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I11 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I12 4822 126 14241 330pF 50V 0603 2I16 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I17 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I18 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I19 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I20 4822 126 14241 330pF 50V 0603 2I21 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I22 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I23 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I24 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I25 4822 126 14241 330pF 50V 0603 2I26 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I27 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I36 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I39 3198 024 44730 47nF 50V 0603 2I46 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2I47 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2I48 2238 587 15624 1.2nF 10% 50V 0402 2I51 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2I52 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I54 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I57 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I58 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2I59 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2I60 2238 587 15624 1.2nF 10% 50V 0402 2I62 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I64 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I65 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I66 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I67 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I69 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I70 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I71 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I72 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I73 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I74 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I75 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I76 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I77 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I78 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I79 2020 021 91886 22µF 20% 16V 2I80 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I81 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I82 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I83 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I84 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I85 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2I98 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2I99 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2IA0 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2IA1 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2IA2 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2IA4 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2IA5 2020 021 91557 100µF 20% 16V 2IA7 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2IB3 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2IB7 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2IB8 2020 552 96628 10nF 10% 16V 0402 2IB9 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2IC0 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2IC1 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2IC3 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2IC6 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2IC7 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2IC9 4822 126 13881 470pF 5% 50V 2IG1 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2IH2 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2IH3 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2IH5 4822 126 14241 330pF 50V 0603 2IH6 4822 126 14241 330pF 50V 0603 2IH7 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2IJ4 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603
2IJ5 4822 126 14585 100nF 10% 50V 2L01 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L02 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L03 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L04 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L05 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L06 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L07 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L08 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L09 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L10 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L11 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2L12 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L13 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L14 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L15 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L16 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L17 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L18 2020 552 96305 4.7µF 20-80% 10V 2L19 4822 124 23002 10µF 20% 16V 2L20 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L21 3198 035 71040 100nF 10% 16V 0402 2L22 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2L23 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2L24 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2L25 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2L26 4822 126 14549 33nF 16V 0603 2L27 4822 126 13193 4.7nF 10% 63V 2L28 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2L29 4822 122 33761 22pF 5% 50V 2L30 4822 126 14226 82pF 5% 50V 0603 2L31 3198 017 34730 47nF 16V 0603 2L32 5322 126 11579 3.3nF 10% 63V 2L33 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2L34 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2L35 4822 126 13879 220nF 20% 16V 2L36 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2L37 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2L38 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2L39 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2L40 2020 552 96305 4.7µF 20-80% 10V 2L41 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2L42 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2L43 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2L44 2020 552 96305 4.7µF 20-80% 10V 2L45 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2L46 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2L47 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2L48 4822 122 33752 15pF 5% 50V 2L50 4822 122 33752 15pF 5% 50V 2L52 3198 017 34730 47nF 16V 0603 2L53 4822 124 81059 220µF 20% 4V 2L54 3198 017 34730 47nF 16V 0603 2L57 3198 017 34730 47nF 16V 0603 2L58 4822 124 81059 220µF 20% 4V 2L59 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402 2L60 4822 126 11785 47pF 5% 50V 0603 2L63 4822 126 11785 47pF 5% 50V 0603 2P80 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2P81 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2S01 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2S02 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2S03 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2S04 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2S05 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2S06 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S07 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S08 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S09 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S11 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S13 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S14 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S15 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S16 2020 552 94427 100pF 5% 50v 0603 2S22 3198 017 44740 470nF 10V 0603 2S42 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 2T01 2020 021 91887 470µF 20% 16V 2T04 3198 024 44730 47nF 50V 0603 2T05 2020 021 91887 470µF 20% 16V 2T06 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2T09 3198 017 34730 47nF 16V 0603 2T12 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2T13 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2T15 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2U08 2020 021 91887 470µF 20% 16V 2U23 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2U26 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2U29 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2U31 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2U37 2020 552 96448 1µF 10% 16V 2V05 4822 122 33741 10pF 10% 50V 2V06 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2V07 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2V08 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603
2V09 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2V10 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2V11 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2V12 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2V13 2238 586 59812 100nF 20-80% 50V 0603 2Y00 2238 869 15101 100pF 5% 50V 0402 2Y01 2020 552 96618 1nF 10% 50V 0402
f
3000 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3001 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3002 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3003 4822 117 13525 24k 1% 0.62W 0603 3005 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3006 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3007 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3008 4822 117 13523 220 5% 0.63W 3010 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3011 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3012 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3013 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3014 4822 051 30682 6.8k 5% 0.062W 3015 4822 051 30474 470k 5% 0.062W 3016 5322 117 13034 1.5k 1% 0.063W 0603 3017 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3018 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3019 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3020 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3021 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3022 4822 117 11817 1.2k 1% 0.062W 3023 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3024 4822 051 30273 27k 5% 0.062W 3025 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3026 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3027 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3028 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3029 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3030 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3031 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3032 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3033 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3034 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3035 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3036 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3039 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3046 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3047 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3048 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3049 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3050 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3051 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3052 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3053 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3054 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3055 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3056 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3057 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3059 2322 704 66201 620 1% 0603 3061 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3062 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3064 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3065 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3066 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3067 4822 051 30474 470k 5% 0.062W 3069 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3072 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3073 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3074 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3076 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3077 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3078 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3079 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3080 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3081 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3082 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3083 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3084 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3085 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3086 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3087 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3088 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3089 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3090 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3091 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3092 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3093 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3097 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3099 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3100 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3101 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3102 3198 031 11010 4 x 100 5% 1206 3301 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603
Page 62
EN 122 FTP1.1E10.
Spare Parts List
3303 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603
h 2322 750 63908 3.9Ω 5% 1206 fusible
3304 3308 4822 051 20474 470k 5% 0.1W 3368 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3370 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3371 4822 051 30479 47 5% 0.062W 3372 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3373 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3374 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3375 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3376 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3377 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3378 4822 051 30153 15k 5% 0.062W 3379 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3380 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3381 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3382 3198 031 05610 560 5% 0.01W 0402 3385 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3393 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603
h 4822 117 11152 4.7Ω 5% 0.062W
3400 3402
h 2322 750 63908 3.9Ω 5% 1206 fusible
3403 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3404 4822 051 30561 560 5% 0.062W 3405 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3406 2322 702 60279 27 5% 0.1W 0603 3408 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3411 3198 031 02720 2.7k 5% 0.01W 0402
h 4822 117 11152 4.7Ω 5% 0.062W
3412 3414 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3415 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3418 4822 051 30391 390 5% 0.062W 3419 2120 108 91909 39 5% 0603 3435 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3436 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3437 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3439 4822 051 30391 390 5% 0.062W 3441 4822 051 30562 5.6k 5% 0.063W 0603 3445 4822 051 30121 120 5% 0.062W 3463 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3468 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3473 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3474 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W
h 5322 117 11726 10Ω 5%
3475 3476 4822 051 30561 560 5% 0.062W 3700 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3701 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3702 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3703 3198 031 01090 10 5% 0.01W 0402 3704 3198 031 01090 10 5% 0.01W 0402 3705 3198 031 01090 10 5% 0.01W 0402 3706 3198 031 01090 10 5% 0.01W 0402 3707 3198 031 01090 10 5% 0.01W 0402 3708 3198 031 01090 10 5% 0.01W 0402 3709 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3710 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3711 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3712 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3713 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3714 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3715 4822 051 30181 180 5% 0.062W 3716 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3717 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3718 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3719 4822 051 30332 3.3k 5% 0.062W 3720 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3721 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3722 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3723 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3725 4822 051 30332 3.3k 5% 0.062W 3726 4822 117 11817 1.2k 1% 0.062W 3727 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3728 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3729 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3730 3198 031 06810 680 5% 0.01W 0402 3736 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3737 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3738 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3739 3198 031 01530 15k 5% 0.01W 0402 3740 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3741 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W 3743 4822 051 30153 15k 5% 0.062W 3744 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3745 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3746 5322 117 13042 3.9k 1% 0.063W 0603 3747 4822 051 30154 150k 5% 0.062W 3748 4822 117 12891 220k 1% 0.063W 0603 3749 5322 117 13042 3.9k 1% 0.063W 0603 3750 4822 051 30392 3.9k 5% 0.063W 0603 3751 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3752 4822 117 12917 1 5% 0.062W 0603 3753 4822 117 12917 1 5% 0.062W 0603 3754 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3755 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3756 5322 117 13056 8.2k 1% 0.063W 0603
3758 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3759 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3762 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3764 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3770 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3771 4822 117 12971 15 5% 0.62W 0603 3772 4822 117 12971 15 5% 0.62W 0603 3773 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3774 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3781 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3782 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3783 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3792 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3793 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3794 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3795 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3796 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3797 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3798 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3800 5322 117 13058 150 1% 0.063W 0603 3802 5322 117 13058 150 1% 0.063W 0603 3803 5322 117 13058 150 1% 0.063W 0603 3804 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3811 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3812 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3814 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3815 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3817 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3818 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3819 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3820 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3821 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3822 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3823 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3824 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3825 5322 117 13058 150 1% 0.063W 0603 3826 5322 117 13058 150 1% 0.063W 0603 3827 5322 117 13058 150 1% 0.063W 0603 3828 4822 051 30339 33 5% 0.062W 3829 4822 117 12971 15 5% 0.62W 0603 3831 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3832 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3833 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3834 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3836 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3837 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3838 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3839 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3840 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3841 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3842 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3843 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3844 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3845 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3846 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3847 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3849 4822 051 30569 56 5% 0.062W 3850 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3851 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3852 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3853 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3856 4822 051 30569 56 5% 0.062W 3A00 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3A01 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402
h 4822 117 13568 6.8Ω 5% 1206
3A03 3A06 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A09 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3A11 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3A13 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A14 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A15 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3A16 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A17 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A19 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A20 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3A22 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3A23 4822 117 13603 33k 5% 0402 3A25 4822 051 30331 330 5% 0.062W 3A26 4822 117 13603 33k 5% 0402 3A27 3198 031 01530 15k 5% 0.01W 0402 3A28 3198 031 01530 15k 5% 0.01W 0402 3A29 4822 051 30331 330 5% 0.062W 3A30 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3A32 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A33 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A34 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A35 4822 051 30105 1M 5% 0.062W 3A36 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A38 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3A3A 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A3B 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A3E 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A3F 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A40 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603
3A42 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A45 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A46 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3A47 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A48 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3A49 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A50 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3A51 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A52 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A53 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3A55 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3A56 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3A66 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3C00 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3C01 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3C03 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3C04 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3C05 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3C08 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3C10 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3C11 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3D40 4822 117 10361 680 1% 0.1W 3D41 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3D44 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3D45 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3D46 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3D47 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3D48 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3D49 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3D50 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3D51 2322 704 62002 2k 1% 0603 3D52 2322 704 61002 1k 1% 0603 3D53 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3D54 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3D55 2322 704 61002 1k 1% 0603 3D56 2322 704 65102 5.1k 1% 0603 3D57 5322 117 13047 330 1% 0.063W 0603 3D58 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3D60 5322 117 13036 1.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3D61 5322 117 13048 3.3k 1% 0.063W 0603 3D62 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3D63 2322 704 62202 2.2k 1% 0603 3D64 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3D65 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3D66 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3D67 5322 117 13036 1.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3D68 5322 117 13048 3.3k 1% 0.063W 0603 3D69 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3D70 5322 117 13048 3.3k 1% 0.063W 0603 3D71 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3D72 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402
h 4822 117 11748 2.2Ω 5% 1206
3D73 3D79 2322 704 62202 2.2k 1% 0603 3D80 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3D81 4822 117 10361 680 1% 0.1W 3D82 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3D83 2322 704 61002 1k 1% 0603 3D84 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3D85 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3D86 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3D87 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3D88 5322 117 13036 1.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3D89 4822 051 30183 18k 5% 0.062W 3D90 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3D92 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3D93 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3D95 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3D96 4822 117 13602 2.2k 5% 0.01W 0402 3D97 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3D98 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3D99 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3E04 4822 051 30479 47 5% 0.062W 3E05 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3E06 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3E07 2350 035 10152 4 x 1.5k 5%
h 4822 117 11151 1Ω 5%
3E08 3E11 2350 035 10152 4 x 1.5k 5% 3E12 2350 035 10152 4 x 1.5k 5% 3E14 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E16 3198 031 03320 3.3k 5% 0402 3E18 4822 117 13602 2.2k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E19 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3E20 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E21 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3E22 2350 035 10152 4 x 1.5k 5% 3E23 2350 035 10152 4 x 1.5k 5% 3E24 2350 035 10152 4 x 1.5k 5% 3E25 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3E26 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E27 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3E28 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3E29 4822 117 13597 330 5% 0402 0.01W 3E30 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E31 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402
Page 63
Spare Parts List
EN 123FTP1.1E 10.
3E32 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E33 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E34 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E35 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E36 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E37 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3E38 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E39 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E40 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3E41 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3E42 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3E43 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3E44 3198 031 14710 4 x 470 5% 1206 3E45 4822 117 13597 330 5% 0402 0.01W 3E49 4822 117 13602 2.2k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E50 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E51 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E52 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E53 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E55 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E56 4822 117 13603 33k 5% 0402 3E57 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3E60 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E62 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3E63 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E69 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3E70 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3E73 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3E74 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3E75 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3E77 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3E78 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3E79 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3E80 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3E88 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3E89 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3E91 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3E92 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3E93 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3I00 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3I08 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3I28 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3I29 3198 031 01830 18k 5% 0.01W 0402 3I30 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3I31 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I34 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3I35 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I36 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3I37 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I38 3198 031 08220 8.2k 5% 0.5W 3I39 3198 031 02720 2.7k 5% 0.01W 0402 3I40 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I50 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3I51 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I52 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3I53 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I54 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I55 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I56 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I57 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I58 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I59 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I60 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I61 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I62 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I63 3198 031 03920 3.9k 5% 0402 3I64 3198 031 08220 8.2k 5% 0.5W 3I65 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I66 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I67 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I68 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I69 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3I70 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I71 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3I72 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I73 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 3I74 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3I75 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I76 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I77 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I78 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I79 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I80 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I81 3198 031 08220 8.2k 5% 0.5W 3I82 3198 031 03920 3.9k 5% 0402 3I83 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I84 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I85 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3I86 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3I87 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 3I89 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3I90 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3I91 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3I92 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W
3I98 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IA2 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IA3 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IA4 3198 031 08220 8.2k 5% 0.5W 3IA5 3198 031 08220 8.2k 5% 0.5W 3IA6 3198 031 08220 8.2k 5% 0.5W 3IA7 3198 031 08220 8.2k 5% 0.5W 3IB1 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IB2 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IB3 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IB4 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W 3IB5 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3IB6 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3IB8 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IB9 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402
h 4822 117 13574 1.5Ω 5% 1206
3IC1 3IC2 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IC3 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IC4 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IC6 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3ID0 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3ID1 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402
h 4822 117 11151 1Ω 5%
3ID2 3ID6 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3ID7 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3ID8 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3IE0 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IE1 4822 117 11297 100k 5% 0.1W 3IE2 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IE3 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IE7 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3IE8 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3IE9 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IF0 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3IF1 4822 117 13543 470 5% 0402 3IF2 3198 031 02720 2.7k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IF3 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IF4 4822 117 13543 470 5% 0402 3IF5 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IF6 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IF7 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IF8 4822 117 13602 2.2k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IF9 3198 031 03320 3.3k 5% 0402 3IH0 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3IH1 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3IH8 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3IH9 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3II0 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3II1 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3II2 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3II3 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3II4 3198 031 04730 47 5% 0402 3IJ0 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3IJ1 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3IJ7 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IJ8 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3IK2 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IK3 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402
h 4822 117 11152 4.7Ω 5% 0.062W
3IK7 3IN5 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IN6 4822 117 13601 22k 5% 0402 3IN7 4822 117 10361 680 1% 0.1W 3IP0 5322 117 13056 8.2k 1% 0.063W 0603 3IP1 4822 117 11817 1.2k 1% 0.062W 3IP2 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3IP3 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3IP4 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W
h 4822 117 11748 2.2Ω 5% 1206
3IP5 3IP6 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3IP7 4822 051 30272 2.7k 5% 0.062W 3IP8 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3IQ0 4822 051 30109 10 5% 0.062W 3IQ4 4822 117 10361 680 1% 0.1W 3IQ5 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3IQ6 4822 051 30759 75 5% 0.062W 3IS0 4822 117 12521 68 1% 0.1W 3IS1 4822 117 12521 68 1% 0.1W 3IS2 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IS3 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IS4 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3IT0 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3IT1 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3IT5 4822 117 12521 68 1% 0.1W 3IT6 4822 117 12521 68 1% 0.1W 3IT8 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3L03 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3L04 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3L05 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3L06 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3L07 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3L08 3198 031 02720 2.7k 5% 0.01W 0402 3L11 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3L12 4822 117 13543 470 5% 0402 3L17 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W
3L22 4822 117 13602 2.2k 5% 0.01W 0402 3L23 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3L24 2350 033 91002 4 x jumper ARV341 3L25 2350 033 91002 4 x jumper ARV341 3L26 2350 033 91002 4 x jumper ARV341 3L27 2350 033 91002 4 x jumper ARV341 3L28 4822 117 13543 470 5% 0402 3L29 2350 033 91002 4 x jumper ARV341 3L30 2350 033 91002 4 x jumper ARV341 3L31 4822 051 20471 470 5% 0.1W 3L32 4822 051 20471 470 5% 0.1W 3P65 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3P66 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3P67 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3P69 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3S01 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 3S02 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W 3S03 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W 3S04 3198 031 03320 3.3k 5% 0402 3S05 3198 031 05620 5.6 k 5% 0.01W 0402 3S06 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3S07 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3S08 4822 051 30221 220 5% 0.062W 3S09 4822 117 13606 10k 5% 0.01W 0402 3S10 3198 031 01530 15k 5% 0.01W 0402 3S11 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3U47 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3U48 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3U49 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3U50 4822 051 30474 470k 5% 0.062W 3U56 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3U57 4822 051 30222 2.2k 5% 0.062W 3U58 4822 051 30392 3.9k 5% 0.063W 0603 3U59 4822 117 12925 47k 1% 0.063W 0603 3V03 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3V04 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3V05 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3V06 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3V07 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3V08 4822 117 13548 1k 5% 0402 3V09 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3V10 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3V11 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3V12 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 3V13 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3V14 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3V15 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3V16 4822 117 13546 47 5% 0402 3V17 3198 031 04720 4.7k 5% 0402 3Y02 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402
h 4822 117 11151 1Ω 5%
3Y03 9001 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9002 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9010 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9011 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9012 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9013 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9016 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9019 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9020 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9318 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9322 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 9406 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9410 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9413 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9416 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9417 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9418 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9419 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9420 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9702 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9703 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9708 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9712 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9714 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9716 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9717 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9721 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9723 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9725 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9727 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9728 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9729 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9744 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9747 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9760 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9761 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9762 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9763 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9764 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9765 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9766 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9772 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9A00 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402
Page 64
EN 124 FTP1.1E10.
Spare Parts List
9A01 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9A04 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9A05 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9A06 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9A09 4822 051 20008 Jumper 0805 9C02 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9D55 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9E54 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I00 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I02 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I13 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9I32 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I33 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I34 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I35 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I36 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I37 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I39 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I41 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I48 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I49 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I77 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I79 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I81 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I82 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I88 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9I89 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9IB5 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9IB9 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9IC1 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9IC2 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9IC3 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9ID1 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9ID2 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9ID3 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9ID4 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9IS0 4822 117 13545 100 1% 0402 9IS2 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9IS3 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9L04 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9P69 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9P70 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9P71 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9S01 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S02 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S03 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S04 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S05 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S06 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S07 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S08 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S09 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S11 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S13 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S14 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S15 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S16 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S17 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S30 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S31 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S32 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S33 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S34 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S35 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S36 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S37 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S38 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9S65 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9T01 4822 051 30223 22k 5% 0.062W 9T04 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9T07 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9T08 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9T11 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9T12 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9T13 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9T14 4822 051 20008 Jumper 0805 9T15 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 9U99 2038 035 13207 1000µF 20% 16V 9Y01 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402 9Y03 4822 117 13605 Jumper 0402
b
5401 3198 018 56880 6.8µH 10% 0603 5403 2422 549 44461 Trimmer 40MHz 5CCE 5404 2422 535 95427 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5405 2422 535 95427 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5406 3198 018 52280 2.2µH 10% 0603 5408 2422 549 44983 Trimmer 78MHz 5CCB 5411 3198 018 32770 0.27µH 10% 0805 5415 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5416 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5700 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz
5701 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5702 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5703 4822 157 71206 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5706 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5707 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5710 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5711 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5712 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5713 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5714 4822 157 71206 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5715 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5716 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5717 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5718 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5719 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5720 4822 157 11876 6.8µH 10% 0805 5721 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5722 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5724 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5725 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5726 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5727 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5728 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5729 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5731 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5736 4822 157 11876 6.8µH 10% 0805 5737 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5742 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5743 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5744 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5746 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5747 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5748 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5750 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5751 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5752 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5753 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5754 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5755 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5756 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5757 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5A00 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5A01 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5A03 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5A06 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5A17 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 5A18 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 5A19 4822 157 11828 22µH 20% 0805 5A20 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5A21 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5D51 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5D52 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5D54 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5D56 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5D57 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5D58 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5D59 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5E00 2422 549 42896 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5E01 2422 549 42896 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5E02 2422 549 42896 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5E03 2422 549 42896 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5E04 2422 549 42896 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5E05 2422 549 42896 Bead 120 at 100MHz 5E08 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5E50 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5E51 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5E53 2422 535 94134 10µH 20% 0805 5E57 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5E58 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5I02 2422 549 43769 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5I03 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5I04 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5I05 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5I06 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5I07 2422 549 43769 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5I08 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5I09 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5I10 2422 536 00667 1000µF 20% 7032 5I11 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5I21 2422 549 43769 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5I22 2422 549 43769 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5I23 2422 549 43769 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5L02 3198 018 51080 1µH 10% 0603 5L04 3198 018 54770 0.47µF 10% 0603 5L06 3198 018 51080 1µH 10% 0603 5L07 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5L08 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5L09 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5L10 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5L11 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5L12 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5L13 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5L14 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5L15 4822 156 21729 Bead 1k at 100MHz
5L16 4822 117 10353 150 1% 0.1W 5L17 4822 117 10353 150 1% 0.1W 5L18 4822 117 10353 150 1% 0.1W 5L21 4822 117 10353 150 1% 0.1W 5P51 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5S01 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5S02 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5S03 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5S04 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5S05 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5T02 2422 535 94134 10µH 20% 0805 5U05 2422 535 94134 10µH 20% 0805 5U06 2422 535 94134 10µH 20% 0805 5U07 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5U08 4822 157 11716 Bead 30 at 100MHz 5V06 3198 018 90050 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5V07 3198 018 90050 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5V08 3198 018 90050 Bead 1k at 100MHz 5Y01 2422 549 45325 Bead 67 at 100MHz. 5Y02 2422 549 45325 Bead 67 at 100MHz. 5Y03 2422 549 45325 Bead 67 at 100MHz. 5Y04 2422 549 45325 Bead 67 at 100MHz. 5Y05 2422 549 45325 Bead 67 at 100MHz.
d
6000 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6001 4822 130 80622 BAT54 6002 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6003 4822 130 80622 BAT54 6004 4822 130 80622 BAT54 6005 4822 130 11422 PLVA2650A 6403 9340 552 30115 BA591 6830 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6831 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6832 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6833 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6834 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6835 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6836 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6837 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6838 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6839 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6840 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6841 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6842 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6843 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6844 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6845 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6846 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6847 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6A00 4822 130 11551 UDZS10B 6A01 4822 130 10838 UDZ3.3B 6A02 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6D53 9340 553 52115 BAS321 6D54 9340 553 52115 BAS321 6D55 9340 553 52115 BAS321 6D56 9340 553 52115 BAS321 6D57 4822 130 11423 PLVA2656A 6D58 4822 130 11423 PLVA2656A 6D59 4822 130 11423 PLVA2656A 6D60 4822 130 11423 PLVA2656A 6D61 4822 130 11423 PLVA2656A 6D62 4822 130 11564 UDZ3.9B 6D63 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6D64 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6E54 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6E55 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6I03 5322 130 34337 BAV99 6I04 5322 130 34337 BAV99 6I05 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6I07 5322 130 34337 BAV99 6I08 5322 130 34337 BAV99 6I10 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I11 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I12 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I13 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I14 9340 548 61115 PDZ12B 6I15 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I22 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I23 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I24 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I25 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I26 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I27 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I28 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I29 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I30 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I31 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I32 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I33 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I34 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I35 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B
Page 65
Spare Parts List
EN 125FTP1.1E 10.
6I36 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I37 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I38 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I39 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I40 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I41 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I42 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I43 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I44 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I45 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I46 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I47 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I48 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I49 9340 548 61115 PDZ12B 6I50 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I51 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I52 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I53 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I54 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I55 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I56 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I69 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I70 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I90 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I91 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I92 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I93 4822 130 11416 PDZ6.8B 6I94 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6I95 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6I96 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6I97 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6I98 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6I99 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6IA0 9340 548 61115 PDZ12B 6IA6 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6IA7 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6T01 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6T03 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6T08 9340 548 71115 PDZ33B 6U16 4822 130 11522 UDZ15B 6V01 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6V02 4822 130 11397 BAS316 6V03 4822 130 11397 BAS316
ce
7001 9352 684 81557 SAA5801H/015 7002 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7003 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7004 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7005 9322 172 45668 LF33ABDT 7007 9322 157 20668 MSM51V18165F-60J 7008 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7009 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7010 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7012 9322 156 72668 M29W400BT-90N1 7013 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7014 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7017 4822 130 10255 MUN2213 7018 9352 115 40118 74LVC245APW 7019 9352 115 40118 74LVC245APW 7020 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7066 3104 317 45871 Software (check
7067 3104 317 45611 Software (check
7070 3104 317 45891 Software (check
7307 9352 630 99118 TDA9181T 7320 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7322 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7323 9352 625 24518 TDA9321H/N2 7402 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7403 5322 130 60159 BC846B 7407 4822 130 60373 BC856B 7410 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7411 5322 130 60159 BC846B 7414 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7415 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7706 9322 142 88668 LF25CDT 7707 5322 130 60159 BC846B 7708 5322 130 60159 BC846B 7709 5322 130 60159 BC846B 7710 5322 130 60159 BC846B 7711 2422 486 80938 Socket 32p f 7712 9351 870 00118 74HC573PW 7713 9352 688 09557 SAA4978H/V204 7714 9965 000 02179 MS81V04160-25TB 7715 4822 209 73852 PMBT2369 7717 9322 183 81668 MSM54V12222B-25JS 7718 9352 695 58557 SAA4993H/V1 7719 9322 183 81668 MSM54V12222B-25JS 7722 9965 000 02179 MS81V04160-25TB
Prod.Surv)
Prod.Surv)
Prod.Surv)
7723 9965 000 02179 MS81V04160-25TB 7724 9322 188 08702 T8F24EF-0002 EAGLE 7725 4822 209 73852 PMBT2369 7727 9322 170 14668 LF15ABDT 7740 9352 687 20125 74LVC1G125GW 7741 9352 687 20125 74LVC1G125GW 7742 9352 115 40118 74LVC245APW 7743 9352 115 40118 74LVC245APW 7744 9352 115 40118 74LVC245APW 7745 9352 115 40118 74LVC245APW 7746 9322 190 24668 CY2302SC-1 7747 9352 687 21165 74LVC1G126GW 7748 9352 687 20125 74LVC1G125GW 7999 3104 317 45521 Software (check
7A00 4822 209 30095 LM833D 7A01 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7A02 9322 196 03702 MSP3411G-QI-B8V3 7A03 4822 209 30095 LM833D 7A07 9322 183 05668 TS482ID 7A08 4822 130 60373 BC856B 7A09 4822 130 60373 BC856B 7A10 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7D51 4822 209 12776 TDA8601T/C1 7D52 4822 130 62755 BF570 7D53 4822 130 62755 BF570 7D54 4822 130 62755 BF570 7D55 4822 130 62755 BF570 7D57 9322 131 22668 TSH95D 7D59 9322 145 26668 M24C02-WMN6 7E02 9322 196 51668 EPCS1SI8 7E05 9322 170 14668 LF15ABDT 7E08 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7E09 9322 195 65668 AD9066JR 7E10 9352 686 35118 PCA9515DP 7E12 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7E13 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7E14 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7E16 9322 195 65668 AD9066JR 7E17 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7E18 9322 146 75685 TS431L 7E19 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7E20 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7E21 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7E22 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7E23 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7E24 9322 146 75685 TS431L 7I01 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7I02 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7I05 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7I07 4822 130 60142 BC869 7I09 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7I10 9352 686 35118 PCA9515DP 7I11 4822 130 10255 MUN2213 7I12 4822 130 10255 MUN2213 7I13 4822 130 42804 BC817-25 7I14 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7I15 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7I16 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7I17 9322 116 87668 TEA6422D 7I19 9352 686 35118 PCA9515DP 7I20 9351 869 40118 74HC4053PW 7I22 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7I35 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7I36 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7I37 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7I38 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7I44 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7L01 9322 181 72671 AD9883AKST-110 7L02 4822 209 17398 LD1117DT33 7L03 4822 209 73852 PMBT2369 7P56 4822 209 17345 M62320FP 7S03 9340 425 20115 BC847BS 7S04 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7U14 3198 010 42310 BC847BW 7U15 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7U16 9322 091 04668 SI4410DY 7V01 9322 196 44671 EP1C6Q240C8 7V02 9322 159 45668 DS90C385MTD
Prod.Surv.)
EMC Interface [EMC]
Various
0002 3122 358 76831 EMC foam fiter panel 1320 2422 025 16545 Connector 10p m 1330 2422 025 16545 Connector 10p m 1345 2422 025 16835 Connector 3p m 1355 2422 025 16835 Connector 3p m
g
2300 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2301 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2302 3198 016 31020 1nF 10% 25V 0603 2303 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2304 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2305 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2306 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2307 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603 2308 5322 126 11583 10nF 10% 50V 0603
f
3300 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3301 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3302 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3303 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3304 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3305 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3306 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3307 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W
b
5300 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5301 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5302 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5303 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5304 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5305 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5306 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5307 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5308 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5309 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5310 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5311 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5312 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz 5313 2422 549 43062 Bead 600 at 100MHz
Led + Switch [LD]
Various
0320 2422 025 16545 Connector 10p m 1101 2422 128 02927 Switch push 2p
g
2107 4822 124 12095 100µF 20% 16V 2120 2020 024 90166 10µF 20% 35V 2126 4822 126 14583 470nF 10% 16V 0805
f
3101 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3102 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3103 4822 051 30561 560 5% 0.062W 3104 4822 117 13632 100k 1% 0.62W 0603 3105 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W 3106 4822 051 30151 150 5% 0.062W 3107 4822 051 30471 470 5% 0.062W 3108 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3109 4822 051 30101 100 5% 0.062W 3120 4822 051 30472 4.7k 5% 0.062W 3121 4822 051 30103 10k 5% 0.062W 3122 4822 051 30332 3.3k 5% 0.062W 3123 4822 051 30332 3.3k 5% 0.062W 3124 4822 051 30102 1k 5% 0.062W
h 2322 702 60335 3.3MΩ 5% 0603
3126
h 2322 702 60335 3.3MΩ 5% 0603
3127 4101 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603 4107 4822 051 30008 Jumper 0603
b
5100 2422 549 43769 Bead 30 at 100MHz
d
6101 4822 130 11564 UDZ3.9B 6103 4822 130 83915 TLMV3100 6105 4822 130 11564 UDZ3.9B 6127 9322 140 63685 TEMD5000
Page 66
EN 126 FTP1.1E10.
ce
7103 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7105 3198 010 42320 BC857BW 7107 9322 178 03667 TSOP2136YA1 7120 5322 209 82941 LM358D
Top Control Panel [P]
Various
0053 3104 308 10551 TC assy knob R LCD 30" 0055 3104 308 10561 TC assy knob L LCD 30" 0057 3104 304 25831 TC frame LCD 30" 0058 3104 308 10571 TC assy knob M LCD 30" 0345 4822 267 10459 Connector 3p 1701 2422 128 02778 Tact switch 1702 2422 128 02778 Tact switch 1703 2422 128 02778 Tact switch 1704 2422 128 02778 Tact switch 1705 2422 128 02778 Tact switch
f
3001 4822 051 20391 390 5% 0.1W 3003 4822 117 13528 200 1% 0.125W 0805 3005 4822 117 11951 2k 1% 0.1W 3009 4822 117 11534 1.1k 1% 0.1W 3011 4822 117 10845 620 1% 0.1W 3999 4822 051 20471 470 5% 0.1W 9001 4822 051 20008 Jumper 0805 9003 4822 051 20008 Jumper 0805 9005 4822 051 20008 Jumper 0805 9006 4822 051 20008 Jumper 0805
Spare Parts List
Page 67

11. Revision List

First release
Revision List
EN 127FTP1.1E 11.
Loading...